Symmetricom TimeProvider 1000 User`s guide

Add to my manuals
224 Pages

advertisement

Symmetricom TimeProvider 1000 User`s guide | Manualzz

TimeProvider 1000 and 1100

Edge Clock

User’s Guide

Revision G – April 2008

Part Number 097-58001-02

Symmetricom, Inc.

2300 Orchard Parkway

San Jose, CA 95131-1017

U.S.A.

http://www.symmetricom.com

Copyright © 2003–2008 Symmetricom, Inc.

All rights reserved. Printed in U.S.A.

All product names, service marks, trademarks, and registered trademarks used in this document are the property of their respective owners.

Table of Contents

Contents

How to Use This Guide

Purpose of This Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14

Who Should Read This Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14

Structure of This Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14

Conventions Used in This Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

Warnings, Cautions, Recommendations, and Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

Related Documents and Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

Where to Find Answers to Product and Document Questions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

What’s New in This Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

Chapter 1 Overview of the TimeProvider

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20

Shelves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20

Expansion Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22

Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22

Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23

Clocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23

Operating Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23

Performance Monitoring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24

Phase Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

MTIE Calculations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

TDEV Calculations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

FFOFF Calculations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26

NTP Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26

SNMP – Simple Network Management Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28

Physical Description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28

Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30

System Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33

Communication Ports. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34

Ethernet. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34

Local Craft Serial Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34

Remote Serial Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34

Reference Input Signals. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34

Selecting the Input. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35

SSMs and Quality Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36

GPS Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38

Clock Performance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39

Output Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39

Retimer Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40

097-58001-02 Revision G – April 2008 TimeProvider User’s Guide

3

Table of Contents

Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

Synchronization Status Messages (SSMs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

SmartClock. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43

BesTime . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43

Normal Tracking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44

GPS Holdover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44

Chapter 2 Engineering and Ordering Procedures

Shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46

Model 1000 Front Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46

Model 1100 Rear Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46

Expansion Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46

Front Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46

Rear Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47

Input Modules. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47

Output Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47

IMC and IOC Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48

GPS Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49

Ordering and Parts List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51

Ordering the Cable Management Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51

Ordering an NTP or SNMP License . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51

Chapter 3 Installing the TimeProvider

Getting Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54

Pre-Installation Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54

Performing a Site Survey . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54

Gathering the Tools. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55

Unpacking the Unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56

Rack Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56

Making Connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60

Making Ground Connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60

Making Power Connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61

Verifying Power and Grounding Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62

Making Input Connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

Making Output Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66

Making Retimer Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69

Making Alarm Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70

Making GPS Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71

Making Communications Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79

Changing Communications Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80

Installing Connections to the Ethernet Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80

Installation Check List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82

Powering Up the Shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82

4 TimeProvider User’s Guide

097-58001-02 Revision G – April 2008

Table of Contents

Working With Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82

Properly Handling Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82

Inserting Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83

Removing Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83

Firmware Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84

Chapter 4 Provisioning the TimeProvider

TL1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86

TL1 Command Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86

TL1 Response Format. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87

Autonomous Messages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88

Starting the TimeProvider for the First Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88

Logging In for the First Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89

Setting Communications Parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91

Setting RS-232 Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91

Setting Ethernet Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93

Checking Communication Links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94

Defining the Security Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94

Defining a User at the Security Access Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95

Managing the User List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96

Logging In . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96

Logging Out. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97

Adding a User . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98

Changing the Current User’s Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99

Displaying a User’s Access Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99

Editing a User’s Access Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100

Deleting A User . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101

Retrieving Current Users. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101

Using SynCraft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102

Starting SynCraft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102

Creating a Connection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103

Opening a Connection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104

Closing a Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104

Provisioning the IOC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105

Setting the System Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105

Setting the IOC Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107

Provisioning the Input Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108

Setting the Input State. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108

Setting the GPS Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109

Setting the Input Frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110

Setting the Input Frame Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110

Controlling Automatic Reference Switching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111

Setting the Input Quality Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112

Setting the Input Priority Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113

Manually Selecting the Reference. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114

Provisioning the SSM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115

097-58001-02 Revision G – April 2008 TimeProvider User’s Guide

5

Table of Contents

Enabling CRC4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116

Using Performance Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116

Provisioning the Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118

Enabling and Disabling the Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119

Provisioning the Output Framing Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119

Provisioning Retimer Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120

Enabling and Disabling the Retimers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120

Provisioning the LBO. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121

Provisioning Cut-thru Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122

Provisioning NTP Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122

Activating NTP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123

Editing NTP Peer Server Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123

Enabling NTP Authentication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124

Setting the NTP Authentication Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125

Provisioning Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126

Provisioning the Alarm Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126

Provisioning System-Level Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130

Retrieving Current Alarm Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131

Retrieving Current Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132

Displaying Alarm Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134

Clearing Alarms. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135

Provisioning SNMP Parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136

Activating SNMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136

Adding a User . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137

Changing A User’s Security Parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137

Displaying the Connected Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137

Deleting a User . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137

Setting Up SNMP Traps, Informs, and Notifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137

System Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138

Displaying Events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138

Displaying the Configuration of the TimeProvider . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139

Restarting the TimeProvider . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140

Saving Provisioning Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141

Chapter 5 Testing the TimeProvider

Testing the TimeProvider . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146

Test Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146

Test Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146

Verifying Normal Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146

Testing Alarm Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148

Testing the IOC Operating Modes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148

Testing the Reference Switching. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149

Testing the Non-Revertive Operating Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149

Testing the Revertive Operating Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150

Testing the Power Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150

Detecting Input Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151

6 TimeProvider User’s Guide

097-58001-02 Revision G – April 2008

Table of Contents

Testing the Communication Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151

Testing the Local Craft Serial Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151

Testing the Remote Serial Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152

Testing the Ethernet Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152

Testing the Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153

Test Record . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153

Chapter 6 Maintaining and Troubleshooting the TimeProvider

Preventive Maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156

Safety Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156

ESD Considerations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156

Diagnosing the IOC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157

Reading LED Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157

Interpreting Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158

Removing the IOC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158

Replacing the IOC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160

Diagnosing the IMC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162

Reading LED Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162

Interpreting Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163

Replacing the IMC or IMC/TPIU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163

Diagnosing the External TPIU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164

Diagnosing the Retimer Module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164

Replacing Output Modules. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165

Replacing the Input Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166

Troubleshooting the TimeProvider . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167

Using Events to Troubleshoot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167

Using Alarm Codes to Troubleshoot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176

Repairing the TimeProvider . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187

Obtaining Technical Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187

Upgrading the Firmware. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187

Upgrading the IMC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189

Upgrading the IOC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189

Returning the TimeProvider . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191

Repacking the Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191

Equipment Return Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192

Manual Updates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192

Chapter 7 Specifications of the TimeProvider

Communications Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194

Serial Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194

LAN Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195

Clocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195

Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196

097-58001-02 Revision G – April 2008 TimeProvider User’s Guide

7

Table of Contents

Outputs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198

Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200

Input Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200

Output Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200

Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200

Roof Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201

Mechanical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201

TimeProvider 1000 Front-Access Shelf. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201

TimeProvider 1100 Rear-Access Shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201

Environmental . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202

Default Command Access Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204

Alarm Default Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205

Default Equipment Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208

Default Input Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209

Default Output Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210

Default Retimer Parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214

System Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214

Installing SynCraft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215

Index

8 TimeProvider User’s Guide

097-58001-02 Revision G – April 2008

Table of Contents

Figures

1-1

1-2

1-3

1-4

1-5

1-6

1-7

1-8

1-9

3-1

3-2

3-10

3-11

3-12

3-13

3-14

3-15

3-16

3-17

3-3

3-4

3-5

3-6

3-7

3-8

3-9

3-18

3-19

3-20

3-21

3-22

3-23

3-24

3-25

3-26

4-1

4-2

4-3

TimeProvider 1000 ETSI-style Shelf. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

21

TimeProvider 1100 Rear Access Shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

21

TimeProvider 1100 Expansion Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

22

Front Panel of the TimeProvider 1000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

29

Rear Panel of the TimeProvider 1100 – Old Version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

29

Rear Panel of the TimeProvider 1100 – New Version. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

30

Block Diagram of the TimeProvider . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

31

The TimeProvider Interface Unit (TPIU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

38

The Integrated IMC/TPIU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

38

Installing the Model 1000 Shelf, Expansion Panel, and Cable Management tray – 19-inch Rack. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

57

Installing the Model 1100 Shelf, Cable Management tray, and Expansion

Panel – 19-inch Rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

58

Installing the Model 1000 Shelf and Expansion Panel – 23-inch Rack. . . . .

59

Installing the Model 1100 Shelf and Expansion Panel – 23-inch Rack . . . . .

60

Power Terminal Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

62

Assembling the ETSI (Front Access) Power Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

62

BNC Input Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

63

Wire-Wrap Input Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

64

DB9 Input Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

64

BT43 Input Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

65

Metric (Siemens) Input Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

65

BNC and Wire-Wrap Output Modules. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

67

DB9 Output Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

67

BT43 and Metric (Siemens) Output Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

68

B-422 Output Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

68

Front Panel of the T1 (wire-wrap) and E1 (BNC) Retimer Modules . . . . . . .

69

Sample Installation Schematic for a Retimer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

69

DB-25 Alarm Connector (Front View) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

71

Locating the GPS Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

71

Antenna-to-Shelf Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

73

Installing the Antenna Bracket on a Pipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

74

Installing the Antenna Bracket on a Post . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

74

Attaching the Antenna to the Bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

75

Assembling the Lightning Suppressor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

76

Mounting the TPIU and Expansion Panel on the Same Rack Ears . . . . . . .

78

Mounting the TPIU with a Model 1000 ETSI-Style Shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

78

The SynCraft Main Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102

The Create New Connection Window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103

Logical View of the TimeProvider . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104

097-58001-02 Revision G – April 2008 TimeProvider User’s Guide

9

Table of Contents

10 TimeProvider User’s Guide

097-58001-02 Revision G – April 2008

Table of Contents

Tables

4-1

4-2

4-3

4-4

5-1

5-2

5-3

3-1

3-2

3-3

3-4

3-5

3-6

3-7

3-8

3-9

3-10

2-1

2-2

2-3

2-4

2-5

1-1

1-2

1-3

1-4

1-5

Typical Power Consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33

SSU-Based Reference Selection Scenarios. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37

Subtending-Based Reference Selection Scenarios . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37

ANSI SSM Quality Level Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

ITU SSM Quality Level Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42

Input Modules Available for the TimeProvider . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47

Output Modules and Accessories Available for the TimeProvider . . . . . . . . . . 47

IOC and IMC Modules Available for the TimeProvider . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48

GPS Parts and Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49

TimeProvider Shelves. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51

Power Connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61

Input Connector Modules Available for the IOC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

Pinout for the DB9 Input Module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64

Output Connector Modules. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66

Pinout for the DB9 Output Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66

Alarm Connector Pinout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70

Connector Pinouts for the Serial Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79

Ethernet Communications Port Signal Connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81

Installation Completeness Checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82

Firmware Feature Matrix. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84

TL1 Syntax Conventions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86

Default Mask Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117

Alarm Conditions and Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127

Provisioning Record . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141

LED Conditions for the IOC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146

LED Conditions for the IMC and IMC/TPIU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147

Record of Test Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153

6-1

6-2

6-3

6-4

6-5

6-6

6-7

6-8

Preventive Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156

LED Conditions for the IOC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157

LED Conditions for the IMC and IMC/TPIU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162

LED Conditions for the External TPIU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164

Event Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167

Set and Clear Conditions for Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174

Alarm Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176

Conditions Causing an Event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184

7-1

7-2

7-3

7-4

7-5

7-6

Serial Port Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194

Holdover Characteristics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195

Hold-in and Pull-in Range. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196

Input Signal Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197

Output Signal Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198

Output Alarm Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200

097-58001-02 Revision G – April 2008 TimeProvider User’s Guide

11

Table of Contents

7-7

7-8

A-1

A-2

A-3

A-4

A-5

A-6

Typical Power Consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200

Antenna Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201

Default Access Levels for TL1 Commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204

Default Alarm Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205

Default Equipment Parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208

Default Input Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209

Default Output Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210

Default Retimer Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211

12 TimeProvider User’s Guide

097-58001-02 Revision G – April 2008

How to Use This Guide

This section describes the format, layout, and purpose of this guide.

In This Preface

Purpose of This Guide

Who Should Read This Guide

Structure of This Guide

Conventions Used in This Guide

Warnings, Cautions, Recommendations, and Notes

Related Documents and Information

Where to Find Answers to Product and Document Questions

What’s New in This Guide

097-58001-02 Revision G – April 2008 TimeProvider User’s Guide

13

How to Use This Guide

Purpose of This Guide

Purpose of This Guide

The TimeProvider User’s Guide describes the procedures for unpacking, installing, using, maintaining, and troubleshooting the Symmetricom TimeProvider. It also includes appendixes that describe default values and how to install the included software application SynCraft.

Who Should Read This Guide

Chapter 1, Overview of the TimeProvider

, and Chapter 2, Engineering and Ordering

Procedures

, are written for non-technical audiences who need general information

about the product. Chapter 3, Installing the TimeProvider

and subsequent chapters contain technical information about the product. Other chapters and appendixes describe installation, maintenance, and configuration instructions or details primarily intended for qualified maintenance personnel.

Structure of This Guide

This guide contains the following sections and appendixes:

Chapter, Title Description

Chapter 1, Overview of the

TimeProvider

Chapter 2, Engineering and

Ordering Procedures

Chapter 3, Installing the

TimeProvider

Chapter 4, Provisioning the

TimeProvider

Chapter 5, Testing the

TimeProvider

Chapter 6, Maintaining and

Troubleshooting the TimeProvider

Chapter 7, Specifications of the

TimeProvider

Appendix A, Factory Default

Values

Provides an overview of the product, describes the major hardware and software features, and lists the system specifications.

Lists the part number and ordering procedure for all

TimeProvider parts and accessories.

Contains procedures for unpacking and installing the product.

Describes the TL1 commands required to provision the

TimeProvider after installing the unit.

Provides checklist-based commissioning tests that should be performed after completing turn-up and software configuration to ensure the system is ready for normal operation.

Contains preventive and corrective maintenance, and troubleshooting procedures for the product.

Lists the specifications for the TimeProvider

Includes a list of the factory default values for hardware and software parameters.

14

TimeProvider User’s Guide

097-58001-02 Revision G – April 2008

Chapter, Title

Appendix B, CRAFT Software

Reference

Index

How to Use This Guide

Conventions Used in This Guide

Description

Describes how to use the CRAFT software interface with the

TimeProvider.

Provides references to individual topics within this guide.

Conventions Used in This Guide

This guide uses the following conventions:

Acronyms and Abbreviations – Terms are spelled out the first time they appear in text. Thereafter, only the acronym or abbreviation is used.

Revision Control – The title page lists the printing date and versions of the product this guide describes.

Typographical Conventions – This guide uses the typographical conventions described in the table below.

When text appears this way...

TimeProvider User’s Guide

SSU

CRITICAL

IOC1

Select File, Open...

Press

Press

;

Enter

TimeProvider

Username:

PING

STATUS

A re-timing application

Symmetricom does not recommend...

Structure of This Guide , on page 14

... it means:

The title of a document.

An operating mode, alarm state, status, or chassis label.

Click the Open option on the File menu.

A named keyboard key.

The key name is shown as it appears on the keyboard. An explanation of the key’s acronym or function immediately follows the first reference to the key, if required.

Text in a source file or a system prompt or other text that appears on a screen.

A command you enter at a system prompt or text you enter in response to a program prompt. You must enter commands for case-sensitive operating systems exactly as shown.

A word or term being emphasized.

A word or term given special emphasis.

The blue text, when viewed in a pdf file, indicates a hyperlink to the indicated text.

097-58001-02 Revision G – April 2008 TimeProvider User’s Guide

15

How to Use This Guide

Warnings, Cautions, Recommendations, and Notes

Warnings, Cautions, Recommendations, and Notes

Warnings, Cautions, Recommendations, and Notes attract attention to essential or critical information in this guide. The types of information included in each are explained in the following examples.

Warning: To avoid serious personal injury or death, do not disregard warnings. All warnings use this symbol. Warnings are installation, operation, or maintenance procedures, practices, or statements, that if not strictly observed, may result in serious personal injury or even death.

Caution: To avoid personal injury, do not disregard cautions. All cautions use this symbol. Cautions are installation, operation, or maintenance procedures, practices, conditions, or statements, that if not strictly observed, may result in damage to, or destruction of, the equipment. Cautions are also used to indicate a long-term health hazard.

ESD Caution: To avoid personal injury and electrostatic discharge

(ESD) damage to equipment, do not disregard ESD cautions. All

ESD cautions use this symbol. ESD cautions are installation, operation, or maintenance procedures, practices, conditions, or statements that if not strictly observed, may result in possible personal injury, electrostatic discharge damage to, or destruction of, static sensitive components of the equipment.

Electrical Shock Caution: To avoid electrical shock and possible personal injury, do not disregard electrical shock cautions. All electrical shock cautions use this symbol. Electrical shock cautions are practices, procedures, or statements, that if not strictly observed, may result in possible personal injury, electrical shock damage to, or destruction of components of the equipment.

Recommendation: All recommendations use this symbol.

Recommendations indicate manufacturer-tested methods or known functionality. Recommendations contain installation, operation, or maintenance procedures, practices, conditions, or statements, that provide important information for optimum performance results.

Note: All notes use this symbol. Notes contain installation, operation, or maintenance procedures, practices, conditions, or statements, that alert you to important information, which may make your task easier or increase your understanding.

16

TimeProvider User’s Guide

097-58001-02 Revision G – April 2008

How to Use This Guide

Related Documents and Information

Related Documents and Information

Other helpful documents and software tools are listed below. See your

Symmetricom representative or sales office for a complete list of available documentation.

TimeCraft management software – Help files within the application

TimePictra management software – See the User’s manual provided on the system CD

TimeProvider TL1 Reference Guide, part number 097-58001-01

Software Release Notice, part number 097-58001-24

Note: Symmetricom offers a number of applicable training courses designed to enhance product usability. Contact your local representative or sales office for a complete list of courses and outlines.

Where to Find Answers to Product and Document

Questions

For additional information about the products described in this guide, please contact your Symmetricom representative or your local sales office. You can also contact us on the web at www.symmetricom.com

.

What’s New in This Guide

No Revision F of this guide has been issued. Revision G of this guide includes the following new information:

Added SNMP – Simple Network Management Protocol , on page 28.

Corrected the Transit Node traceable row in

Table 1-4 .

Added the Synchronized - Traceability Unknown row to Table 1-5

.

Revised Ordering an NTP or SNMP License , on page 51, to include SNMP.

Updated Table 3-10 to include the latest firmware release.

Renamed IP Subnet address to Subnet mask and removed IP Host entries from

Table 4-4 .

Removed the shims from the drawing in Figure 3-23

and the text in step 5 on page 74.

097-58001-02 Revision G – April 2008 TimeProvider User’s Guide

17

How to Use This Guide

What’s New in This Guide

Added the latest firmware revisions to

Table 3-10

.

Revised the order of the steps in

Starting the TimeProvider for the First Time , on page 88.

Revised the text in the first paragraph of

Logging In for the First Time , on page

89.

Added the 115200 baud rate to

Setting the Baud Rate , on page 91, and

Table

6-5

.

Corrected the length of the password in Managing the User List , on page 96.

Added metric values to the table in Provisioning the LBO , on page 121.

Corrected the EXDSC alarm description in Table 4-3

.

Added the GPSCLRDEL and GPSFLTDEL keywords to the table in Provisioning

System-Level Alarms , on page 130.

Added Provisioning SNMP Parameters , on page 136.

Added the GPSCLRDEL and GPSFLTDEL keywords to Table 4-4

.

Added “GPS faults” to the list in Detecting Input Errors , on page 151.

Added GPSCLRDEL and GPSFLTDEL to

Table 6-5 ,

Table 6-8

, and

Table A-4

.

18

TimeProvider User’s Guide

097-58001-02 Revision G – April 2008

Chapter 1 Overview of the TimeProvider

This chapter describes the TimeProvider product.

In This Chapter

Overview

Operating Modes

Performance Monitoring

NTP Operation

SNMP – Simple Network Management Protocol

Physical Description

Functional Description

System Power

Communication Ports

Reference Input Signals

Clock Performance

Output Signals

Alarms

Synchronization Status Messages (SSMs)

SmartClock

BesTime

097-58001-02 Revision G – April 2008 TimeProvider User’s Guide

19

Chapter 1 Overview of the TimeProvider

Overview

Overview

The TimeProvider is Synchronization Supply Unit (SSU) designed specifically to meet the needs at the network edge. In small offices where core office synchronization solutions are critical, an edge clock like the TimeProvider is ideal because of its compact size and flexibility. Using the integrated GPS features, you can use the TimeProvider in a “small” Central Office to act as a Primary Reference

Source (PRS).

The TimeProvider’s unique design incorporates the input, output, and clock functions in a single card, available with either a Rubidium or quartz oscillator. This allows you to simplify the storage inventory required for future expansion needs.

The TimeProvider shelf requires only three plug-in cards to operate with full redundancy: dual Input/Output/Clock cards (IOCs) and a single Information

Management Card (IMC), which serves as a communications/alarm interface.

When dual IOCs are installed, you can mix any combination of Rubidium and quartz oscillators (for example, Rb/Rb, Rb/Qz, or Qz/Qz) to the needs of the network. The main shelf provides up to 32 redundant universal timing outputs; an optional

Expansion Panel provides an additional 32 redundant outputs.

Using Symmetricom’s SmartClock™ technology design, the oscillators within the

IOCs are enhanced with improved performance and accuracy. Using intelligent firmware algorithms, SmartClock “learns” the effects of the ageing of the clock while it is locked to a reference signal and stores this information in its memory. If the reference signals are lost or disqualified, SmartClock uses the stored data to compensate for frequency changes while the TimeProvider continues to distribute highly stable synchronization signals.

The TimeProvider also uses Symmetricom’s BesTime

®

algorithm when the GPS input is activated. By using other inputs as references, Bestime calculates and determines a weighting factor for each of the inputs and ensembles them in the overall timing scheme to provide very accurate timing outputs. In the event of GPS signal loss, BesTime continues to predict GPS timing information to provide reliable system timing outputs and holdover performance, ensuring that system reliability is

maintained. See BesTime , on page 43 for more information.

Shelves

The TimeProvider is available in two shelf models. Each shelf supports up to 32 redundant output channels.

The TimeProvider 1000 is a 175 mm tall ETSI shelf that meets the requirements

of ETSI 300 119-4 January 1994. Figure 1-1

shows the TimeProvider 1000 shelf.

The TimeProvider 1100 is a 130 mm tall rear-access shelf; indicators are on the front panel and connections are available on the rear panel.

Figure 1-2

shows the front panel of the TimeProvider 1100.

20

TimeProvider User’s Guide

097-58001-02 Revision G – April 2008

Chapter 1 Overview of the TimeProvider

Overview

Figure 1-1.

TimeProvider 1000 ETSI-style Shelf

Figure 1-2.

TimeProvider 1100 Rear Access Shelf

Expansion Panel

The TimeProvider has an optional Expansion Panel that doubles (to 64) the number

of output channels available. Figure 1-3 shows the rear-access version of the

Expansion Panel. The Expansion Panel receives timing signals from the

TimeProvider main shelf through an expansion cable. The Expansion Panel provides four groups (A through D) of eight signals; each group is automatically provisioned to the same output signal type as the corresponding group on the main shelf.

097-58001-02 Revision G – April 2008 TimeProvider User’s Guide

21

Chapter 1 Overview of the TimeProvider

Overview

Figure 1-3.

TimeProvider 1100 Expansion Panel

Inputs

The TimeProvider accepts the following types of input signals:

Primary Reference Signals (PRS): 1.544 MHz, 2.048 MHz, 5 MHz, 6.312 MHz, or

10 MHz

Span input signals:

– E1 or 2.048 MHz analog; user-selectable CAS or CCS framing

– T1 D4, Extended Superframe (ESF)

– 1.544 and 6.312 MHz

– Composite Clock, including Japan Composite Clock (JCC) and Japan

Composite Clock with 400 Hz (JCC4) signals

GPS input:

– GPS signal from the stand-alone TimeProvider Interface Unit (TPIU)

– GPS signal into the TPIU integrated with the IMC (IMC/TPIU card)

The TimeProvider qualifies the input reference signals and detects the following errors: Loss of Signal (LOS), Alarm Indication Signal (AIS), Loss of Framing, and

Synchronization Status Messages (SSM) where applicable.

Reference Input

Signals , on page 34, describes the inputs in more detail.

Outputs

The TimeProvider produces a variety of outputs to meet different signal standards.

Output signal types include 8 kHz, 1.544 MHz, 2.048 MHz, 6.312 MHz, E1, T1, CC,

JCC, JCC4, and TIA/EIA-B-422 (1.544 and 2.048 MHz). The E1 and T1 signals can be provisioned with standard framing that meets G.703 formats. The SSM bit location is user-selectable on E1 outputs; CRC4 must be enabled in order to provide output SSMs. These outputs are available through one of several different

connector panels. See Output Signals , on page 39, for more information on output

signals.

22

TimeProvider User’s Guide

097-58001-02 Revision G – April 2008

Chapter 1 Overview of the TimeProvider

Operating Modes

The TimeProvider outputs are arranged into four groups of eight outputs per group in the Main shelf and four groups of eight outputs per group in the optional

Expansion panel. Each group is labeled A, B, C, and D, and can be configured independently.

Communication

Three communications ports provide access to the TimeProvider: Ethernet, local

Craft serial port, and a Remote serial port. These ports are described in detail in

Communication Ports , on page 34.

Clocks

The TimeProvider’s clock design includes a highly stable ovenized Quartz crystal or

Rubidium oscillator with Direct Digital Synthesis (DDS) to produce accurate synchronization outputs. In a dual-IOC configuration, the clock function is redundant to provide protection, and you can mix and choose any combination of Quartz and

Rubidium oscillator to meet the needs of the network. Each IOC qualifies the input signal and filters jitter and wander noise elements that may exist. In the event that all input references are lost or disqualified, the TimeProvider’s clock design, together with the SmartClock technology, goes into holdover mode with the oscillator providing the system reference.

The Rubidium IOC meets Stratum 2/Type II performance; the Quartz IOC meets

Stratum 3E/Type I performance.

Operating Modes

You can configure the TimeProvider to operate in one of three modes:

Synchronization Supply Unit (SSU), Subtending (SUB) as defined by Telcordia

GR-378 Section 7, or Primary Reference Receiver (PRR) when the GPS input is available. Each mode is unique in its operation, and is defined in the following paragraphs.

SSU Mode

This is the TimeProvider’s default operating mode. You can select the system reference from any valid input on the PRS, INP1, INP2, or GPS connectors.

The GPS input operates as another input reference to the TimeProvider and is treated in the same manner as all other input references (PRS, INP1, or INP2). If the GPS input is active but later becomes disqualified, then the TimeProvider switches to the next available input reference according to the switching rules

(Priority, SSM, etc.). If there are no other qualified inputs, then the TimeProvider enters the holdover state until an input is requalified.

097-58001-02 Revision G – April 2008 TimeProvider User’s Guide

23

Chapter 1 Overview of the TimeProvider

Performance Monitoring

In the SSU mode, the INP1 and INP2 inputs cannot be provisioned to receive

Composite Clock (CC) signals, including JCC or JCC4. The method of selecting the system reference is described in

Selecting the Input , on page 35.

SUB Mode

This mode allows the TimeProvider to operate as a Remote shelf where phase is critical. When you select the SUB mode, INP1 and INP2 are automatically set for

CC inputs (including JCC and JCC4). Outputs provisioned for CC are phase-aligned with the selected CC input reference. Other output types comply with G.703 and

GR-1244.

To configure the TimeProvider for Subtending mode, see Setting the System Mode , on page 105.

PRR Mode

In PRR mode, the GPS is automatically selected as the system reference input.

This requires that you connect a GPS signal to the TimeProvider through either: the standalone TPIU (used with Antenna Kits 990-58545-01 or 990-58545-02) or the integrated IMC/TPIU card (used with Antenna Kits 990-58545-03 or

990-58545-04)

This mode complies with ITU-T G.811 and Telcordia GR-2830 requirements for

Primary Reference Receivers/Clocks. Valid signals on the PRS, INP1, or INP2 connectors are used in conjunction with BesTime to extend compliance with

GR-2830/G.811 standards.

The PRR mode uses Symmetricom’s BesTime servo control that allows the

TimeProvider to continue providing outputs in case GPS tracking is lost, the GPS data loses integrity, or if the IMC is removed from the shelf.

BesTime , on page 43

provides more information on the BesTime technology.

To configure the TimeProvider for PRR mode, see Setting the System Mode , on page 105.

Performance Monitoring

The TimeProvider can monitor and qualify all enabled input signals based on phase measurements. It measures the phase differences between the inputs and the output of the corrected clock. From these phase measurements, the TimeProvider computes frequency offset and wander of the input signals. Wander is reported in terms of Maximum Time Interval Error (MTIE) and Time Deviation (TDEV) and creates phase, MTIE, TDEV, and Fractional Frequency Offset (FFOFF) reports.

Performance data is automatically gathered on all enabled or monitored inputs.

24

TimeProvider User’s Guide

097-58001-02 Revision G – April 2008

Chapter 1 Overview of the TimeProvider

Performance Monitoring

Using MTIE and FFOFF data, the TimeProvider qualifies inputs based on these metrics. You can specify thresholds to disqualify inputs and generate corresponding alarms, causing the TimeProvider to switch references or enter the Holdover mode.

For more information on performance monitoring, see

Using Performance

Monitoring , on page 116. The TimeProvider TL1 Reference Guide contains a

section describing the TL1 commands related to performance monitoring.

Phase Measurements

The IOC measures and transfers 1-second phase data with 100 ns resolution from each enabled input to the IMC or IMC/TPIU every 10 seconds. This phase data is averaged to a 1 ns resolution, which is used to produce a 1-minute phase data sample. The 1 ns data sample is the basis for MTIE, TDEV, and FFOFF calculations. The phase data is not used to qualify an input reference source.

TL1 commands are available to display the 60 most recent phase data (at 100 pS resolution) measurements, the previous 86400 1 ns data averages, and the previous 10080 samples of 1-minute 1 ns-resolution data.

MTIE Calculations

MTIE is a measure of the relative noisiness of an input signal that relates to frequency offsets and phase transients. The TimeProvider automatically calculates

MTIE for each enabled input from the 600 most recent 1-second phase updates.

From this calculation, you can retrieve MTIE values for 1, 5, 10, 50, 100, and

500-second windows. You can set an alarm threshold for each of these windows; if the MTIE value exceeds this threshold and the alarm level is set to Minor or higher, the TimeProvider generates an alarm.

You can use the automatic MTIE calculations to qualify each input with user-defined qualification thresholds. If an input exceeds the threshold, then the input reference automatically switches to the next-best input.

You can also set thresholds using pre-defined masks according to ANSI T1.101 (for

PRS inputs), ITU-T G.811 (for PRC inputs), or ITU-T G.812 (for Type I and Type II/III inputs). The TimeProvider performs a second MTIE calculation using the previous

24-hour period; this calculation is not used to qualify inputs.

TDEV Calculations

TDEV is a measure of the relative noisiness of an input signal that relates to its spectral content. The TDEV for each enabled input is automatically calculated from the previous 24-hour period. The TDEV value is used for monitoring only and is not used for qualifying an input signal.

You can retrieve the TDEV values for the following integration times: 1, 5, 10, 100,

500, 1000, 5000, and 7200 (84000/12) seconds.

097-58001-02 Revision G – April 2008 TimeProvider User’s Guide

25

Chapter 1 Overview of the TimeProvider

NTP Operation

FFOFF Calculations

FFOFF is a measure of the frequency deviation of the input signal against the system reference, expressed as a ratio. The TimeProvider automatically calculates

FFOFF for each enabled input from the 600 most recent 1-second phase updates.

You can use the automatic FFOFF calculations to qualify each input with user-defined qualification thresholds. If an input exceeds the threshold and the alarm level is set to Minor or higher, then the input reference automatically switches to the next-best input.

The TimeProvider stores historical FFOFF measurements for each enabled input every 60 seconds. You can retrieve FFOFF data for the prior 24 hours, depending on the number of faults that have occurred.

NTP Operation

The Network Timing Protocol (NTP) function is implemented in the IMC card or

IMC/TPIU card. You can activate the NTP feature by issuing a unique key generated by Symmetricom, based on the serial number of the IMC card or the

IMC/TPIU card, or you can order the TimeProvider with the NTP option factory- installed and activated. Once activated, the NTP function cannot be deactivated.

NTP operates in all three operating modes of the TimeProvider. In the Subtending mode, the NTP server is supported when the system reference is a signal other than GPS. The NTP data is transmitted by the Ethernet port on the shelf, and meets the following standards and specifications:

NTP V3

MD5 Authentication (RFC 1321)

NTP Leap Second correction based on GPS

NTP supports a 10baseT connection under a 40% loading condition, and can handle up to 100 requests per second (RPS) on average

Typical unencrypted response time from the TimeProvider on an unloaded network is < 10 ms

Typical encrypted (MD5) response time from the TimeProvider on an unloaded network is < 50 ms

The client time accuracy is typically 2 ms between the internal NTP clocks of two machines on the same 10 Mb/s Ethernet LAN with a 40% loading condition

Note: NTP over a LAN topology depends on network congestion, and can be up to 50 ms accuracy.

26

TimeProvider User’s Guide

097-58001-02 Revision G – April 2008

Chapter 1 Overview of the TimeProvider

NTP Operation

The NTP implementation in the TimeProvider supports full NTP server and client mode operations, and works with or without GPS reference signals. The

TimeProvider supports the following NTP modes:

Mode 1: GPS available, Server mode – The NTP application defaults to GPS as the master time reference; only NTP Server mode is supported.

Mode 2: GPS available, No Client mode – NTP Client mode is not supported when GPS is available; only NTP Server mode is supported.

Mode 3: GPS not available, Client mode – When GPS is not available, the

TimeProvider will go into client mode to search for time references from user-programmed timeservers with valid IP addresses.

The user can input up to eight IP addresses of other timeservers. If there are multiple timeservers, the TimeProvider performs an ensembling of all the timeservers to determine the system time based on the averaging of all the valid timeservers. The user can also manually select which of the timeservers available to be the prime. The user can set how often to request an update from each individual timeserver from the eight IP addresses, ranging from 16 seconds to 1024 seconds, incrementing in powers of 2.

At any instance in client mode, the time reference within the TimeProvider is totally derived from the ensembling of the timeservers, and is not reliant on the IOC for time ticks.

Mode 4: GPS not available, Server mode – The TimeProvider can be enabled or disabled for server mode operation. This mode is supported only when the Client mode has found and validated the time stamp from the ensembling of the timeservers.

MD5 authentication is included in the NTP implementation. The user can enable or disable the MD5 feature, and is available in server and client modes. Client configuration for MD5 operation requires Server IP, MD5 Authentication Key, and

Key ID.

The user can enter an MD5 Authentication Key of up to 32 ASCII characters that is not case-sensitive. In addition, there is also a key ID ranging from 0 to 65534 in the

MD5 authentication process. When MD5 is enabled and a client requests NTP information but the MD5 key cannot be authenticated or is missing the MD5 key altogether in the request, then the TimeProvider does not process the client’s request. The TimeProvider does not provide any response or events in these two scenarios.

If MD5 is disabled, a client request is returned with the proper NTP time stamp regardless of whether the client has an MD5 key attached in the request.

097-58001-02 Revision G – April 2008 TimeProvider User’s Guide

27

Chapter 1 Overview of the TimeProvider

SNMP – Simple Network Management Protocol

SNMP – Simple Network Management Protocol

The TimeProvider offers two versions of SNMP: v2 and v3. SNMP v3 software offers additional security with authentication and privacy parameters. The security feature allows secure transactions to provide protection against modification of information, masquerade, and message stream modification.

Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) is based on a client-server query-response mode. A manager is the client generating the queries, while an agent is the server generating the responses.

The TimeProvider SNMP is an SNMP agent that requires Ethernet connectivity. If

SNMP is present, port 161 becomes the port of standard SNMP interactive communications, while port 162 becomes the trap port. Since the TimeProvider

SNMP supports all existing functions, full system control of the TimeProvider is maintained through SNMP.

The TimeProvider implements an SNMP agent. A Management Information Base

(MIB) browser or the SNMP Manager is used to access, retrieve, and query information defined by the MIB.

All reports, queries, autonomous messages, control, provisioning, and administration

(except for communication port parameters, Set User ID/Password, Set IP assignments, Reset connection, and SNMP community settings) are available through SNMP. Refer to the TimeProvider TL1 Reference Guide for more information.

Physical Description

The TimeProvider consists of a shelf, plug-in cards, connector adapter panels for the cards, cables, hardware, and software. The TimeProvider is available in two configurations: front access (Model 1000) and rear access (Model 1100), as shown

in Figure 1-1 and Figure 1-2

.

Figure 1-4

illustrates the location of the connectors, cards, and modules in the

TimeProvider 1000.

28

TimeProvider User’s Guide

097-58001-02 Revision G – April 2008

Ethernet

Connector

Remote Serial

Connector

GPS

Connector

Expansion

Connector

Chapter 1 Overview of the TimeProvider

Physical Description

Output Modules

Power

Connector

Power

Connector

IOC 1

Input

Module

IMC Local Craft

Connector

Figure 1-4.

Front Panel of the TimeProvider 1000

IOC 2

Figure 1-5 illustrates the location of the connectors, cards, and modules on the rear

panel of the TimeProvider 1100. The chassis in

Figure 1-5

is the older version that uses a 3-pin power connector.

Power

Connector

Remote Serial

Connector

Expansion

Connector

GPS

Connector

Ethernet

Connector

Power

Connector

Output Modules

Figure 1-5.

Rear Panel of the TimeProvider 1100 – Old Version

Input

Module

097-58001-02 Revision G – April 2008 TimeProvider User’s Guide

29

Chapter 1 Overview of the TimeProvider

Functional Description

Figure 1-6

illustrates the location of the connectors, cards, frame ground lugs, and

modules on the rear panel of the TimeProvider 1100. The chassis in Figure 1-6

is the newer version that uses a terminal block for power connections.

Power

Connector

Remote Serial

Connector

Expansion

Connector

GPS

Connector

Ethernet

Connector

Power

Connector

Frame

Ground Lugs Output Modules

Figure 1-6.

Rear Panel of the TimeProvider 1100 – New Version

Functional Description

Input

Module

The TimeProvider consists of a main shelf and slots for two IOCs and one IMC. One plug-in Input module and up to four plug-in Output modules complete the main shelf, which provides up to 32 outputs. The optional Expansion Panel can provide up to 32 additional outputs, to provide a total of 64 outputs.

This section describes the components and block diagram of the TimeProvider. The

block diagram, shown in Figure 1-7

, contains the following major blocks:

Shelf

Input module

IMC or integrated IMC/TPIU

IOC

Output module

Expansion Panel required for ports 33 through 64

TimeProvider Interface Unit (TPIU)

30

TimeProvider User’s Guide

097-58001-02 Revision G – April 2008

Chapter 1 Overview of the TimeProvider

Functional Description

Figure 1-7.

Block Diagram of the TimeProvider

Shelf

Both the front-access and rear-access shelf provides a chassis for mounting the

Input module, one IMC or one IMC/TPIU, two IOCs, and up to four Output modules.

A backplane provides connections between the modules.

Input Module

The Input module receives the incoming reference signals and contains the alarm input/output connector. A variety of connector modules allows you to select the connector style and input impedance to match the wiring system at the installation site.

Information Management Card (IMC)

The Information Management Card, known as the IMC, contains a processor that manages communications between the two IOCs and the serial and Ethernet communications ports. It also provides communication to the GPS receiver in the antenna; if the IMC fails or is removed, GPS operations cease.

097-58001-02 Revision G – April 2008 TimeProvider User’s Guide

31

Chapter 1 Overview of the TimeProvider

Functional Description

Integrated Information Management Card with TimeProvider Interface Unit

(IMC/TPIU)

For users who use the GPS feature, the integrated IMC/TPIU combines the features of the IMC card with the TPIU into the same size footprint as a stand-alone IMC card (see the descriptions of the IMC and TPIU). The IMC/TPIU reduces rack space requirements by eliminating the rack mounted stand-alone TPIU. Functionally, the

IMC/TPIU supports the same functions as the IMC card, controlling all communication channels within the TimeProvider and managing GPS control processes. If the IMC/TPIU fails or is removed, GPS operations cease.

Input/Output and Clock Module (IOC)

The TimeProvider operates with one or two IOCs. A second IOC in the shelf provides protection should the primary IOC fail. The IOC accepts the incoming reference signal and decodes the SSM, if present.

With the system properly provisioned and a reference signal selected, the local oscillator in the IOC operates in one of the following states:

Warm-up – For up to 20 minutes after applying power to the shelf, the IOC operates in warm-up mode.

Fast-lock – After warm-up is complete, the IOC enters the fast-lock state, where it quickly frequency-locks the local oscillator to the reference input.

Normal lock – After the IOC has completed the fast-lock cycle, it enters the normal lock mode, in which the TimeProvider uses the proper amount of filtering for the selected mode. When set to the SSU mode and locked to an active input traceable to a Primary Reference Source (PRS), the TimeProvider complies with the G.811 and GR-2830-CORE standards.

Holdover – If the reference signal is lost, then the clock enters the holdover mode. The accuracy of the TimeProvider output is then dependent on the quality level of the oscillator in the IOC.

Free-run – If the IOC starts without a system reference, the TimeProvider enters the free-run state after warm-up. If a reference is applied, then the TimeProvider enters the fast-lock and then the normal-lock states.

Bridging – In the event that all input references are lost, the TimeProvider goes into the bridging mode where the outputs continue to provide accurate timing outputs for a user-defined amount of time. If the inputs have not been requalified before the bridging time has elapsed, then the TimeProvider enters the holdover mode.

After the IOC has been in the Normal lock mode for at least three days, SmartClock holdover mode becomes available. Compared to the normal holdover mode, this mode provides a superior output quality.

32

TimeProvider User’s Guide

097-58001-02 Revision G – April 2008

Chapter 1 Overview of the TimeProvider

System Power

Output Module

The Output module provides the output connectors for the TimeProvider. Like the

Input module, each Output module uses one of a variety of connectors that match the wiring system at the installation site.

Making Output Connections , on page 66,

describes the Output Modules available for the TimeProvider and the Expansion

Panel.

Expansion Panel

The Expansion Panel provides up to 32 additional outputs that the TimeProvider

can generate. See Expansion Panel , on page 21 and

Rack Mounting , on page 56

for more information.

TimeProvider Interface Unit

The TimeProvider Interface Unit (TPIU) provides power, communication, and a composite timing reference signal between the antenna and the TimeProvider main shelf. The TPIU is an external, stand-alone rack mounted assembly included in

Antenna Kits 990-58545-01 and 990-58545-02. The TPIU can be used only with

IMC card 090-58031-01. During antenna installation, you can use the LEDs on the

TPIU to detail the status of the received power and antenna communication. See

Making GPS Connections , on page 71 for more information.

System Power

The TimeProvider main shelf has redundant –48v DC inputs. The inputs are diode or’d; in the event that one supply fails, the other takes over. The –48v returns are isolated from the chassis and circuit grounds. A 5 A fuse on the IOC protects the

TimeProvider; the shelf is protected from damage in case the connections are reversed.

The power supply range is from –36 to –72 V DC. The power requirements vary according to the type of IOC installed;

Table 1-1 lists the power requirements.

Table 1-1. Typical Power Consumption

IOC Type

Crystal

Rubidium

Max Power (W) per IOC

40

60

Typical Power (W) per IOC

30

40

(70 with two Rb IOCs)

The procedure for installing power is described in Making Power Connections , on page 61.

097-58001-02 Revision G – April 2008 TimeProvider User’s Guide

33

Chapter 1 Overview of the TimeProvider

Communication Ports

Communication Ports

The TimeProvider contains three communications ports that allow you to provision, monitor, and troubleshoot the shelf. The Ethernet and Remote serial ports are located on the shelf, and the local Craft serial port is located on the IMC. You communicate with the TimeProvider using the TL1 protocol.

You can select one of four security levels for each user; each level has varying

levels of access to provisioning parameters. See Defining the Security Parameters , on page 94.

Ethernet

An Ethernet connector provides connectivity to an Ethernet local area network.

Each main shelf has a unique internet protocol (IP) address. Once the IP address is set and a connection is made to a LAN, you can access the TimeProvider on an intranet.

The Ethernet port supports up to 10 simultaneous connections to port 5000.

Local Craft Serial Port

This EIA-232 port supports local control; you can configure the TimeProvider with

TL1 commands using a terminal or personal computer (PC) with terminal emulation software or Symmetricom’s craft software, SynCraft. The connector is located on the front panel of the IMC or IMC/TPIU card. The default specifications are

9600-8-N-1. The Local port is configured as a DCE interface.

Remote Serial Port

The Remote serial connector can be used in the same manner as the local Craft serial port. The Remote port has additional control support to manage an external modem for remote access. The Remote port is configured as a DTE interface.

Reference Input Signals

The Input module accepts one or two E1, 2.048 MHz analog, T1, and Composite

Clock (including JCC and JCC4) inputs on ports INP1 and INP2. The CC inputs are used solely for Subtending mode; if you provision INP1 or INP2 to a CC type, then

Subtending mode is automatically enabled. You can also connect a 2.048, 5, or 10

MHz or Japan-specific 1.544 MHz or 6.312 MHz input reference signal on the PRS port. The TimeProvider accepts full-level signals or bridged signals (–20 dB); the inputs are terminated per G.703. You can also connect a GPS antenna via the

TimeProvider Interface Unit (TPIU) to the GPS Input port on the shelf, or via the integrated IMC/TPIU card.

34

TimeProvider User’s Guide

097-58001-02 Revision G – April 2008

Chapter 1 Overview of the TimeProvider

Reference Input Signals

Make the input connections using the procedures described in Making Input

Connections , on page 63, then provision the inputs using the software commands

described in Provisioning the Input Reference , on page 108.

Input State

You can provision each input to one of three states:

Disabled – the input is not used

Monitor – the system monitors the input for signal faults and performance data, but it cannot be selected as the system reference

Enabled – the system monitors the input for signal faults and performance data.

The input can be selected as the system reference in SSU or SUB mode or as a backup reference in PRR mode.

Selecting the Input

Many considerations influence which system reference you choose:

SSM or User-assigned Quality Level

User-assigned Priority Level

Switching mode

User-assigned Input State

Active alarms on an input

You can provision the TimeProvider to automatically select the highest-quality input based on priority and performance qualification, or you can manually select the input signal you want to use. If that signal becomes disqualified for any reason, the local oscillator goes into the Holdover mode.

Revertive Switching

Telcordia GR-378 and GR-1244 define two reference selection modes: Revertive and Non-revertive. In the revertive mode, when an input used as the system reference is disqualified (for any reason), if that input returns, it reverts to the system reference when the disqualifying reason is removed. The system reference switches two times: once when the disqualifying event occurs, and again when the input is no longer disqualified. In the non-revertive mode, the system reference does not revert to the initial input when the reason for disqualification is removed. The system reference switches only once when the disqualifying event occurs.

Quality Level and Priority Level

When the REFMODE parameter is provisioned to AUTO, the system reference switches when the input signal is disqualified. When the input signal is re-qualified, the TimeProvider can either keep the current reference or switch back to the re-qualified signal. When the REFMODE parameter is set to FORCED, then the reference does not switch and remains locked to that reference and the local oscillator enters Holdover mode if the input is not re-qualified. You may also

097-58001-02 Revision G – April 2008 TimeProvider User’s Guide

35

Chapter 1 Overview of the TimeProvider

Reference Input Signals

provision the REFMODE parameter to FORCED to select an input as the system reference regardless of the priority levels of other outputs. If this input is lost or is disqualified, then the REFMODE automatically changes to AUTO and the next available reference based on priority and QLEVEL becomes the system reference. If no other input references are available, the TimeProvider enter the Holdover mode.

The QLEVEL ( Setting the Input Quality Level , on page 112) and the PRIORITY

( Setting the Input Priority Level , on page 113) parameters work together with SSMs

to determine the switching strategy for the inputs when the unit is in the SSU mode.

If the active/primary input becomes unavailable, the switching strategy determines which input to use: the TimeProvider uses the input with the next highest QLEVEL.

If all inputs have the same QLEVEL, then the TimeProvider uses the input with the highest PRIORITY.

To provision the TimeProvider as non-revertive, you must provision the user-assigned

Priority Level on all inputs to the same value. To provision the TimeProvider as revertive, you provision any one of the inputs to a different Priority Level.

If the original primary input becomes available again, the REFMODE, QLEVEL and

PRIORITY parameters determine whether the TimeProvider switches back to that input. If REFMODE is set to AUTO, then the reference switches according to the

QLEVEL and PRIORITY settings. If the QLEVEL and/or PRIORITY parameter of the original input is higher than the current input, the TimeProvider reverts back to the original input. If the QLEVEL parameter is the same for all inputs, then the

TimeProvider does not revert back to the original input.

SSMs and Quality Level

Synchronization Status Messages (SSMs) can be included in the bit stream of the incoming signal to indicate its quality level. You must provision the input to read the

SSM, and you must provision the bit position of the incoming SSM.

If the incoming signal does not include SSMs, or if you disable them, then you can provision the Quality Level to an appropriate value. The QLEVEL value is used in the same manner as the incoming SSM to determine which input is used when the active input is disqualified. SSMs are described in more detail in

Synchronization

Status Messages (SSMs) , on page 41.

SSU Mode

Table 1-2 illustrates which input is the active system reference under several

different input conditions when the TimeProvider is in the SSU mode.

36

TimeProvider User’s Guide

097-58001-02 Revision G – April 2008

Chapter 1 Overview of the TimeProvider

Reference Input Signals

Table 1-2. SSU-Based Reference Selection Scenarios

Active Reference

Sequence

QLevel on

PRS

QLevel on

INP1

QLevel on

INP2

Non-Revertive

1

Revertive

2

4

5

6

7

1

2

3

2

4

4

4

4

4

2

2

2

4

4

4

2

2

2

2

2

4

2

2

2

PRS

INP1

INP2

INP2

INP2

INP2

INP2

INP1

INP1

INP2

INP1

INP2

INP1

INP1

8

9

10

2

2

LOS

2

LOS

LOS

LOS

2

2

PRS

PRS

INP2

INP1

PRS

INP2

11

12

13

LOS

LOS

2

LOS

LOS

LOS

LOS

2

2

Holdover

INP2

INP2

Holdover

INP2

PRS

14 2 2 2 INP2 INP1

Note:

1

2

Non-revertive example. Priority Levels set to: PRS = 3, INP1 = 3, and INP2 = 3

Revertive example. Priority Levels set to: PRS = 2, INP1 = 1, and INP2 = 2

Subtending Mode

Table 1-3 illustrates which input is the active system reference under several

different input conditions when the TimeProvider is in the Subtending mode.

Table 1-3. Subtending-Based Reference Selection Scenarios

3

4

1

2

5

6

Sequence

2

2

1

2

1

1

QLevel on

INP1

2

1

1

1

1

LOS

Active Reference

QLevel on

INP2

Non-Revertive

1

INP1

INP2

INP2

INP2

INP2

INP1

INP1

INP2

INP1

INP2

INP1

INP1

Revertive

2

097-58001-02 Revision G – April 2008 TimeProvider User’s Guide

37

Chapter 1 Overview of the TimeProvider

Reference Input Signals

Table 1-3. Subtending-Based Reference Selection Scenarios (Continued)

Active Reference

Sequence

QLevel on

INP1

QLevel on

INP2

Non-Revertive

1

Revertive

2

7

8

LOS

LOS

LOS

1

Holdover

INP2

Holdover

INP2

9 1 1 INP2 INP1

Note:

1

2

Non-revertive example. Priority Levels set to: INP1 = 3, and INP2 = 3

Revertive example. Priority Levels set to: INP1 = 1, and INP2 = 2

GPS Inputs

Symmetricom provides a complete GPS antenna system for the TimeProvider. This includes the Symmetricom GPS Antenna, the TimeProvider Interface Unit (TPIU), and associated cables. An integrated IMC/TPIU is available for installations where rack space is at a premium.

Figure 1-8 illustrates the TPIU, and Figure 1-9

illustrates the integrated IMC/TPIU. See

Making GPS Connections , on page 71 for

more information on installing the GPS Antenna and the TPIU or IMC/TPIU.

Figure 1-8.

The TimeProvider Interface Unit (TPIU)

Figure 1-9.

The Integrated IMC/TPIU

38

TimeProvider User’s Guide

097-58001-02 Revision G – April 2008

Chapter 1 Overview of the TimeProvider

Clock Performance

Clock Performance

Two IOCs are available:

A Rubidium-based version that meets ST2/Type II standards. This IOC meets or exceeds the ST2 requirements in ANSI T1.101 and Telcordia GR-1244, as well as the ITU-T G.812 Type II specification.

A Quartz-based version that meets ST3E/Type I standards. This IOC meets or exceeds the ST3E requirements in ANSI T1.101 and Telcordia GR-1244, as well as the ITU-T G.812 TYPE III specification and ITU-T G.812 Type I specification.

Output Signals

The main shelf has 32 output connections arranged in four groups of eight outputs; each group is labeled A through D. The optional Expansion Panel also has four groups of eight outputs that correspond to each group in the main shelf; using the

Expansion Panel, the TimeProvider supports up to 64 outputs. The outputs are

“universal:” you can select from E1, 2.048 MHz, T1, 8 kHz, CC, JCC, JCC4, 1.544

MHz, and 6.312 MHz. You can provision E1 and T1 signals with standard framing and G.703 formats. Additionally, TIA/EIA B-422 (1.544 and 2.048 MHz) output signals are available using the TIA/EIA B-422 Output module; this module can be installed only in the main shelf and cannot be installed in the Expansion panel.

The output types provisioned in each group of the Master shelf are automatically provisioned in the corresponding group of the Expansion panel and cannot be configured differently.

When you install a Retimer module or a TIA/EIA B-422 Output module in a main shelf output group, then you can provision the corresponding group in the

Expansion panel to any desired output type.

The TimeProvider uses interchangeable Output modules, allowing you to select the connector and termination impedance. Output modules are available with the following connectors and output impedance:

BNC – 75

Ω

DB9 (4 connectors, 2 outputs per connector) – 120

Ω

DB9 (8 connectors, 1 output per connector) – 120

Ω

Metric (Siemens) 1.6/5.6 – 75

Ω

Metric (Siemens) 1.0/2.3 – 75

Ω

Wirewrap – 100

Ω/133Ω

BT43 – 75

Ω

TIA/EIA B-422 Wirewrap – 100

Ω (installed in main shelf only)

097-58001-02 Revision G – April 2008 TimeProvider User’s Guide

39

Chapter 1 Overview of the TimeProvider

Retimer Modules

Each Output module plugs into a slot labeled A through D on the main shelf and on the Expansion Panel and provides connectors and terminations for eight outputs.

Make the output connections using the procedures described in Making Output

Connections , on page 66. You can install the TIA/EIA B-422 Output module in any

of the four groups on the Main shelf only. You provision the output signal type for each Output module using the software commands described in

Provisioning the

Outputs , on page 118.

Retimer Modules

Symmetricom provides E1 and T1 Retimer modules for the TimeProvider. Each module supports two full E1 or T1 circuits (signal types cannot be mixed on a single

Retimer module). The Retimer modules plug into one of the four slots for Output modules in the main shelf. Retimer modules cannot be used in an Expansion Panel.

The TimeProvider meets system NEBS Level 3 and CE Class B requirements for all configurations with a Retimer module.

The E1 Retimer module is only available with BNC connectors. The T1 Retimer module is available only with wire-wrap connections.

Each Retimer module consists of two bi-directional circuits. Side 1 of the circuit provides Reamplifying, Reshaping, and Retiming, or 3R. Side 2 of the circuit provides Reamplifying and Reshaping only. Both Side 1 and Side 2 line interfaces accept signals that are up to 16 dB down from DSX levels.

The TimeProvider generates an alarm when the Retimer exceeds a user-selected slip rate. The default alarm level is NA (No Alarm), and the default slip rate is 4 slips in a 24-hour period. A TL1 command allows you to clear the slip counter associated with each Retimer port.

Should the TimeProvider or the Retimer module ever fail, a “cut-thru” capability provides a relay bypass of the retiming circuit. The cut-thru feature automatically engages under any of the following conditions:

User command – Disabling a port using TL1 commands

Retiming failure – A failure in the electronics (for example, power supply), or if the module is physically removed from the shelf

All IOCs in the TimeProvider fail – IOC fault, physical removal, or shelf-level power failure

When a cut-thru condition is detected, an autonomous event or alarm is generated; the default alarm level is MN (Minor).

40

TimeProvider User’s Guide

097-58001-02 Revision G – April 2008

Chapter 1 Overview of the TimeProvider

Alarms

Alarms

The TimeProvider uses alarms to notify you when certain conditions are deteriorating below user-specified levels. These alarms are indicated by shelf and card status lamps (LEDs) and by TL1 messages reported over the serial/EIA-232 or LAN communication ports. In addition, the input panel has a connector that provides contact closures to activate external alarms.

You can provision the alarm level for most alarms to one of the following levels: non-reportable (NR), non-alarm event (NA), minor (MN), major (MJ), or critical (CR).

Alarms related to the inputs are special cases; you can only provision input alarms for minor, major, or critical. To help prevent spurious or transient input alarms, a delay timer (FLTDELAY) allows you to provision a waiting period that starts after the alarm condition occurs; the alarm is set at the end of the period. A similar timer

(CLRDELAY) clears the alarm after the alarm condition is no longer present.

Recommendation: To prevent Non-Service Affecting LOS alarms, Symmetricom recommends that you provision unused inputs to the Disabled state.

For more information on connecting alarms, see Making Alarm Connections , on page 70. For information on provisioning alarm levels, see

Provisioning the Alarm

Levels , on page 126.

Synchronization Status Messages (SSMs)

The TimeProvider supports input and output SSMs. SSMs provide a method for providing clock quality information to any equipment that uses synchronization inputs.

Table 1-4 describes the ANSI SSM values and the traceability associated

with each value.

Table 1-5 describes the ITU SSM values and the traceability

associated with each value.

Table 1-4. ANSI SSM Quality Level Definitions

Description

Stratum 1 Traceable

Synchronized – traceability unknown

Stratum 2 traceable

Transit Node traceable

Stratum 3E traceable

Stratum 3 traceable

3

4

1

2

5

6

Quality Level Abbreviation

PRS

STU | UNK

ST2 | TYPE II

TNC | TYPE V

ST3E | TYPE III

ST3 | TYPE IV

097-58001-02 Revision G – April 2008 TimeProvider User’s Guide

41

Chapter 1 Overview of the TimeProvider

Synchronization Status Messages (SSMs)

Table 1-4. ANSI SSM Quality Level Definitions (Continued)

Description

SONET Minimum Clock traceable

(20 ppm clock)

Stratum 4 traceable (32 ppm clock)

Do Not Use for synchronization

7

8

9

Quality Level Abbreviation

SMC

ST4

DUS

Table 1-5. ITU SSM Quality Level Definitions

Description

Synchronized – Traceability Unknown

Primary Reference Clock

Transit Node

Local Node

Synchronization Equipment Clock

Do Not Use for synchronization

0

2

4

8

11

15

Quality Level Abbreviation

UNK

PRC

SSUT

SSUL

SEC

DNU

The TimeProvider handles SSMs in accordance with T1X1.3 TR33, T1.101-1999,

GR-253, and GR-378.

Input SSMs

The TimeProvider extracts and decodes the SSM (if present) on the available inputs. Using this information, the TimeProvider can automatically select the input with the higher quality level.

You can manually provision the input quality level for those signals that do not have

SSM information or you can provision INP1 and INP2 to read the SSM on the input; in either case the quality level of the reference input becomes the system’s quality level, which is passed through to the outputs in the output SSM. If the IOC enters the Free-run or Holdover mode, the system’s quality level is determined by the

CLKTYPE parameter for the local oscillator on the selected IOC module. You can provision the CLKTYPE parameter to Type I, Type II, ST2, or ST3E.

Output SSMs

You must provision the TimeProvider’s outputs according to the type of SSM operation you are using:

For ANSI SSM operation, set the output type to Extended SuperFrame (ESF) for

ANSI SSM operation.

For ITU SSM operation, set the output type to Channel Associated Signaling

(CAS) or Common Channel Signaling (CCS) with CRC4 framing. The SSM bit location can be set by the user.

42

TimeProvider User’s Guide

097-58001-02 Revision G – April 2008

Chapter 1 Overview of the TimeProvider

SmartClock

These output formats automatically generate SSMs. The quality level of the

TimeProvider’s output depends on the quality level of the input signal or the quality level of the local oscillator. During normal operation, when a qualified input is used as the active timing reference, the TimeProvider copies the input’s quality level to all

DS1 ESF outputs and E1 CAS4 or CCS4 outputs. T1 SSM messages are mapped to the corresponding equivalent E1 SSM message and vice versa.

If the IOC is operating in Holdover mode for any reason, the SSM quality is the internal level of the oscillator installed in the IOC.

SmartClock

The TimeProvider uses Symmetricom’s SmartClock technology, which predicts frequency changes due to aging of the local oscillator in the IOC; this offsets this deterministic behavior by steering the output with a corrected deviation.

The TimeProvider begins the learning process as soon as you apply a valid external reference source. The SmartClock technology is enabled after 24 hours of continuous lock; the TimeProvider then issues an event message similar to this:

IOC1,EQPT,NA,SCAVAIL,NSA,04-12-14,12:13:14:\”SMARTCLOCK ALGORITHM, ENABLED\”

If you reset the IOC or if the oscillator becomes less stable (for example, due to extreme temperature swings), the TimeProvider disables SmartClock and issues an event message similar to this:

IOC1,EQPT,NA,SCAVAIL,NSA,04-12-17,15:16:17:\”SMARTCLOCK ALGORITHM, DISABLED\”

The TimeProvider automatically restarts SmartClock, which then begins to determine a new aging rate for the oscillator.

BesTime

The TimeProvider uses Symmetricom’s BesTime algorithm when it is in the PRR mode to provide enhanced GR-2830-CORE performance during bridging or holdover situations. BesTime minimizes the effect of transients on the reference signal on the outputs of the TimeProvider by comparing them against the system reference to produce the most stable outputs from the TimeProvider.

The BesTime algorithm is based on Symmetricom’s patented use of multiple-input phase-locked loops (MPLLs) to generate a correction signal for the local oscillator

(LO) in the IOC. With GPS as the primary input signal in PRR mode, the signals on the PRS, INP1 and INP2 inputs may be enabled and used in the BesTime ensembling algorithm to generate output signals derived from the optimum weighting of each input.

097-58001-02 Revision G – April 2008 TimeProvider User’s Guide

43

Chapter 1 Overview of the TimeProvider

BesTime

Two weighting algorithms - tracking and holdover - determine which of the inputs are used as the ensembled reference. The tracking algorithm is used during normal operation. If the GPS becomes disqualified, BesTime uses the holdover weighting algorithm to determine what the GPS input would have been had it not been lost.

You can use the RTRV-BESTIME-STATS command to view the current weighting for each input.

The BesTime control loops are designed so that the short-term (under 10 minutes) stability is controlled by the LO, medium-term (10 minutes to several hours) stability is controlled by the ensembled reference, and long-term stability and accuracy is determined by the GPS control input.

The control loops can use either measurement data or prediction data. The inputs are measured for phase, frequency, and drift transients. When the input to either loop is determined to be valid, then the measured data is used to generate the correction signal to the local oscillator. If BesTime detects a transient on the input, it switches to the prediction data before the transient can start to affect the correction signal.

Normal Tracking

During normal GPS tracking, the GPS input provides the source of long-term stability for all inputs to the ensembling algorithm. The ensembling improves the medium-term stability of the output signals.

GPS Holdover

If GPS signals are lost, then all inputs to the ensembling algorithm have lost their source of long-term traceability. BesTime substitutes the inputs with calibration predictions with respect to GPS. Each input is weighted according to the estimated prediction error over 24 hours.

44

TimeProvider User’s Guide

097-58001-02 Revision G – April 2008

Chapter 2 Engineering and Ordering Procedures

This chapter describes the items available with the TimeProvider, and lists the part number for each item.

In This Chapter

Shelf

Expansion Panel

Input Modules

Output Modules

IMC and IOC Modules

GPS Antenna

Ordering and Parts List

Ordering the Cable Management Option

Ordering an NTP or SNMP License

097-58001-02 Revision G – April 2008 TimeProvider User’s Guide

45

Chapter 2 Engineering and Ordering Procedures

Shelf

Shelf

The TimeProvider is available in two configurations: Model 1000 Front Access and

Model 1100 Rear Access.

Model 1000 Front Access

The ETSI-style shelf (990-58001-01) complies with ETSI 300-119 shelf projections.

Each shelf accepts one IMC or IMC/TPIU and one or two IOCs; the shelf also supports one Input module and from one to four Output modules. Each Output module terminates eight output timing signals. Alarms terminate on wire-wrap or

DB-25 connectors, depending on the Input module used. The minimum configuration is one IMC or IMC/TPIU and one IOC for non-protected operation.

Using two IOC modules provides protection in case one of the IOC modules fail.

See

Table 2-5 for part numbers for front-access shelf systems.

Model 1100 Rear Access

The NEBS-style shelf (990-58101-01) accepts one IMC or IMC/TPIU and one or two

IOCs; the shelf also supports one Input module and from one to four Output modules. Each Output module terminates eight output timing signals. Alarms terminate on wire-wrap or DB-25 connectors, depending on the Input module used.

The minimum configuration is one IMC or IMC/TPIU and one IOC for non-protected operation. Using two IOC modules provides protection in case one of the IOC modules fail. See

Table 2-5 for part numbers for rear-access shelf systems.

Expansion Panel

The available Expansion Panel provides additional outputs from the main shelf. Like the main shelf, it comes in two configurations: Model 1000 Front Access and Model

1100 Rear Access. The Expansion Panel supports up to 32 additional output channels. Both panel kits contain rack mounting ears and extenders for 19-inch and

23-inch racks.

Front Access

The front-access Expansion Panel (part number 990-58002-01) provides an additional 32 outputs, for a system total of 64 outputs. The ETSI-style Expansion

Panel supports up to four additional Output Modules with various connector types;

each Output Module provides up to eight output signals. See Table 2-2 for part

numbers for Output modules.

46

TimeProvider User’s Guide

097-58001-02 Revision G – April 2008

Chapter 2 Engineering and Ordering Procedures

Input Modules

Rear Access

The rear-access Expansion Panel (part number 990-58102-01) provides an additional 32 outputs, for a system total of 64 outputs. The NEBS-style Expansion

Panel supports up to four additional Output Modules with various connector types;

each Output Module provides up to eight output signals. See Table 2-2 for part

numbers for Output modules.

Input Modules

Six Input modules are available to match the wiring scheme and termination impedance requirements at the installation site. Select one of these Input modules for use with your TimeProvider system.

Table 2-1 lists the Input modules available

for the TimeProvider.

Table 2-1. Input Modules Available for the TimeProvider

Part Number

090-58061-01

090-58061-02

090-58061-03

090-58061-04

090-58061-05

090-58061-06

Description

BNC Input module

Wire-wrap Input module

DB9 Input module

SMZ/BT43 Input module

Metric (Siemens) 1.0/2.3 Input module

Metric (Siemens) 1.6/5.6 Input module

Output Modules

Symmetricom has eight Output modules available for the TimeProvider that allow you to select the proper termination for your application. You can install any combination of up to four Output modules in the main shelf or in the available

Expansion Panel. Table 2-2

lists the Output modules available for the TimeProvider.

Table 2-2. Output Modules and Accessories Available for the TimeProvider

Part Number

090-58091-01

090-58091-02

090-58071-02

Description

BNC Output module

Wire-wrap Output module

WW Output module for TIA/EIA-B-422 (installed in Main shelf only)

097-58001-02 Revision G – April 2008 TimeProvider User’s Guide

47

Chapter 2 Engineering and Ordering Procedures

IMC and IOC Modules

Table 2-2. Output Modules and Accessories Available for the TimeProvider (Continued)

Part Number

090-58091-03

090-58091-04

090-58091-05

090-58091-06

090-58091-07

090-58081-02

090-58082-01

090-58091-99

093-58091-07

Description

DB9 Output module – four connectors

SMZ/BT43 Output module

Metric (Siemens) 1.0/2.3 Output module

Metric (Siemens) 1.6/5.6 Output module

DB9 Output module – eight connectors

T1 Retimer module spare, WW (installed in the main shelf only)

E1 Retimer module spare, BNC (installed in the main shelf only

Blank module (cover for any unused Output module locations)

Backshell and pin kit for the DB9 Output module (8 sets)

IMC and IOC Modules

Symmetricom has several modules available for the TimeProvider that provide varying levels of clock stability. You can install any combination of IOC modules in the main shelf (Rb-Rb, Rb-Qtz, Qtz-Qtz, Qtz-Rb).

Table 2-3

lists the IOC and IMC modules available for the TimeProvider.

Table 2-3. IOC and IMC Modules Available for the TimeProvider

Part Number

090-58021-01

090-58022-01

090-58031-01

090-58041-01

090-58021-99

Description

Quartz IOC, single-oven

Rubidium IOC

IMC

IMC with Integrated TimeProvider Interface Unit (IMC/TPIU)

Blank Clock Module cover

48

TimeProvider User’s Guide

097-58001-02 Revision G – April 2008

Chapter 2 Engineering and Ordering Procedures

GPS Antenna

GPS Antenna

The following table identifies the parts available for the GPS antenna.

Table 2-4. GPS Parts and Accessories

Part Number

990-58545-01

990-58545-02

990-58545-03

990-58545-04

090-58545-01

090-58545-21

Description

TimeProvider Integrated GPS Antenna Kit, Rear Access, for use with

IMC card (090-58031-01, sold separately)

Kit includes the following items:

090-58545-01 – TimeProvider GPS Antenna

090-58545-21 – TPIU Assembly

090-58544-03 – Rear access TPIU interconnect cable, 1 m (3 ft) with right-angle connectors

093-72010-71 – Antenna mounting hardware

043-00018-01 Lightning suppressor

TimeProvider Integrated GPS Antenna Kit, Front Access, for use with IMC card (090-58031-01, sold separately)

Kit includes the following items:

090-58545-01 – TimeProvider GPS Antenna

090-58545-21 – TPIU Assembly

090-58543-03 – Front access TPIU interconnect cable, 1 m (3 ft) with straight connectors

093-72010-71 – Antenna mounting hardware

043-00018-01 Lightning suppressor

TimeProvider GPS Antenna Kit, Rear Access, for use with the integrated IMC/TPIU (090-58041-01, sold separately)

Kit includes the following items:

090-58545-01 – TimeProvider GPS Antenna

060-58041-03 – Rear access converter cable, 1 m (3 ft) with right-angle connectors

093-72010-71 – Antenna mounting hardware

043-00018-01 Lightning suppressor

TimeProvider GPS Antenna Kit, Front Access, for use with the integrated IMC/TPIU (090-58041-01, sold separately)

Kit includes the following items:

090-58545-01 – TimeProvider GPS Antenna

060-58042-03 – Front access converter cable, 1 m (3 ft) with straight connectors

093-72010-71 – Antenna mounting hardware

043-00018-01 Lightning suppressor

TimeProvider GPS Antenna

Standalone TPIU for Front or Rear Access shelf

097-58001-02 Revision G – April 2008 TimeProvider User’s Guide

49

Chapter 2 Engineering and Ordering Procedures

GPS Antenna

Table 2-4. GPS Parts and Accessories (Continued)

Part Number

090-58041-01

060-58041-03

060-58042-03

060-58543-03

060-58543-10

060-58543-20

060-58543-50

060-58544-03

060-58544-10

060-58544-20

060-58544-50

060-58545-01

060-58545-02

060-58545-05

060-58545-10

060-58545-20

060-58545-30

060-58545-50

060-58545-60

060-58545-80

060-58545-99

154-00023-01

371-001

Description

IMC with TimeProvider Interface Unit card (IMC/TPIU)

Right angle converter cable, 1 m (3 ft). For use with IMC/TPIU card.

Straight converter cable, 1 m (3 ft). For use with IMC/TPIU card.

Front Access TPIU Interconnect cable, 1 m (3 ft)

Front Access TPIU Interconnect cable, 3 m (10 ft)

Front Access TPIU Interconnect cable, 6 m (20 ft)

Front Access TPIU Interconnect cable, 15 m (50 ft)

Note: These cables for use with IMC (090-58031-01) and with standalone TPIU (090-58545-21).

Rear Access TPIU Interconnect cable, 1 m (3 ft)

Rear Access TPIU Interconnect cable, 3 m (10 ft)

Rear Access TPIU Interconnect cable, 6 m (20 ft)

Rear Access TPIU Interconnect cable, 15 m (50 ft)

Note: These cables for use with IMC (090-58031-01) and with standalone TPIU (090-58545-21).

RG-58 cable, 3 m (10 ft)

RG-58 cable, 6 m (20 ft)

RG-58 cable, 15 m (50 ft)

RG-58 cable, 30 m (100 ft)

RG-58 cable, 60 m (200 ft)

RG-58 cable, 90 m (300 ft)

RG-58 cable, 150 m (500 ft)

RG-58 cable, 180 m (600 ft)

RG-58 cable, 240 m (800 ft)

RG-58 cable, 300 m (1000 ft)

Note: Order two (2) cable per installation: one cable from antenna to lightning suppressor and one cable from lightning suppressor to the

TimeProvider system.

Crimp tool for RG-58 cable

TNC connectors for RG-58 cable

50

TimeProvider User’s Guide

097-58001-02 Revision G – April 2008

Chapter 2 Engineering and Ordering Procedures

Ordering and Parts List

Ordering and Parts List

Use

Table 2-5 to identify the available TimeProvider shelf types. The front and rear

access main shelf includes a free copy of the TimeCraft craft GUI (990-46770-99) with each system. All IOCs, IMCs, and Input and Output Connector modules are sold separately.

Table 2-5. TimeProvider Shelves

Model

1000

Front Access Main Shelf

1000

Front Access Expansion Panel

1100

Rear Access Main Shelf

1100

Rear Access Expansion Panel

Outputs

8 to 32

(1 to 4 Output Connector modules)

33 to 64

(1 to 4 Output Connector modules)

8 to 32

(1 to 4 Output Connector modules)

33 to 64

(1 to 4 Output Connector modules)

Part Number

990-58001-01

990-58002-01

990-58101-01

990-58102-01

Ordering the Cable Management Option

Symmetricom offers a cable management kit made of ABS plastic to ensure a neat installation. This kit is 1 RU (Rack Unit) high, and includes two cable trays per kit.

The part number is 093-55595-11.

Ordering an NTP or SNMP License

To enable the NTP or SNMP option within the TimeProvider system, you must enter a key into the IMC or IMC/TPIU card. This key is unique to each system and is based on the serial number of the IMC or IMC/TPIU card.

To order the NTP option with a new TimeProvider system, or for an already-installed unit, include part number 920-58000-01.

To order the SNMP option with a new TimeProvider system, or for an already-installed unit, include part number 920-58002-01.

For an already-installed system, you must also provide the serial number of the IMC or IMC/TPIU card with the order to generate the required password.

Once the order is received, a certificate will be issued to the user to indicate the password with the associated TL1 command to activate the NTP option.

097-58001-02 Revision G – April 2008 TimeProvider User’s Guide

51

Chapter 2 Engineering and Ordering Procedures

Ordering an NTP or SNMP License

52

TimeProvider User’s Guide

097-58001-02 Revision G – April 2008

Chapter 3 Installing the TimeProvider

This chapter describes the procedures for installing the TimeProvider shelf and the available Expansion Panel.

In This Chapter

Getting Started

Unpacking the Unit

Rack Mounting

Making Connections

Installing Connections to the Ethernet Port

Installation Check List

Powering Up the Shelf

Working With Cards

Firmware Features

097-58001-02 Revision G – April 2008 TimeProvider User’s Guide

53

Chapter 3 Installing the TimeProvider

Getting Started

Getting Started

Before beginning the installation, complete the pre-installation check described in

Pre-Installation Check , on page 54, perform the site survey in Performing a Site

Survey , on page 54, and gather the necessary tools and materials described in

Gathering the Tools , on page 55.

Caution: All telecom signal wiring (including I/O, clocks and

Ethernet) must be installed with shielded cabling only and appropriately grounded.

Cabling shall be installed in compliance with intra-building surge, lightning, and EMC requirements.

This section describes the preliminary activities you need to perform before you install the TimeProvider.

Pre-Installation Check

Before installing the TimeProvider, ensure that the following preparations are in place:

The equipment rack is grounded properly

A fused power panel is present (–48 V DC at 5 Amp)

Performing a Site Survey

Physical Space

The TimeProvider is designed to mount in a 19-inch (48 cm) rack. Rack ears are available to mount the shelf in a 23-inch (58 cm) rack. The ETSI front-access shelf is 6.875 inches tall (177 mm), or 4 RU (Rack Units, where 1 RU = 1.75 in/44.45 mm).

For ventilation, plan on leaving a 1 RU space below the shelf. The NEBS rear- access shelf is 5.25 inches tall (133 mm), or 3 RU. For ventilation, plan for a 2 RU space above the shelf and a 1 RU space below the shelf.

The Expansion Panel also mounts in a 19-inch (48 cm) rack, and it is 3.5 inches

(89 mm, or 2 RU) tall. The Expansion Panel does not require ventilation spaces above or below it.

You can mount the shelf so that it protrudes 2 inches (5 cm) or 5 inches (12.7 cm) from the front of the rack, or you can mount it flush with the front of the rack.

Be sure that the installation site is secured. Access to the location can only be gained by service personnel or users who have been instructed about the reasons for the restrictions applied to the location and about any precautions that shall be taken. Access is through use of a tool or lock and key, or other means of security, and is controlled by the authority responsible for the location.

54

TimeProvider User’s Guide

097-58001-02 Revision G – April 2008

Chapter 3 Installing the TimeProvider

Getting Started

Environmental Requirements

To prevent the unit from interfering with other equipment, install and operate the unit according to the following guidelines:

Use only shielded cable for all signal wiring, including I/O, clocks and Ethernet, and ground appropriately at both ends, or as required by local standards.

Secure all cable screws to their corresponding connectors.

Caution: To avoid interference to the TimeProvider, you must consider the electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) of nearby equipment when preparing to install the TimeProvider.

Electromagnetic interference can adversely affect the operation of nearby equipment.

Gathering the Tools

These standard tools and materials are not supplied, but may be required for installing the TimeProvider:

Standard tool kit

ESD wrist strap

Cable ties, waxed string or acceptable cable clamps

No. 16 AWG (minimum) wire (1.31 mm

2

) for –48 V DC, return, and Frame

Ground

Telecom signal wiring (including I/O, clock, and Ethernet) uses shielded cabling of the appropriate impedance required by the specific signal type

Mating connectors for terminating signal wiring

For wire-wrap connections only: No. 22 AWG (0.326 mm

2

) shielded twisted pair wire-wrap cable of the appropriate impedance for the specific signal requirements

Wire-wrap tool (wire-wrap modules only)

Fasteners for mounting the equipment in rack

Digital Voltmeter (DVM) for verifying power connections

Soldering iron and solder for alarm connectors and the ETSI-version power connectors

DB-9 M to DB-9 F cable for connecting to the local Craft port

Laptop computer with communications software such as HyperTerminal,

ProComm Plus, etc. for provisioning the TimeProvider

Optional dual-channel oscilloscope with 100 MHz minimum bandwidth for verifying input and output signals and waveforms

097-58001-02 Revision G – April 2008 TimeProvider User’s Guide

55

Chapter 3 Installing the TimeProvider

Unpacking the Unit

Unpacking the Unit

The TimeProvider and accessories are packaged to protect from normal shock, vibration, and handling damage.

Caution: To avoid electrostatic discharge (ESD) damage to parts that are packaged with the TimeProvider, observe the following procedures.

Unpack and inspect the unit as follows:

1. Wear a properly grounded protective wrist strap or other ESD device.

2. Inspect the container for signs of damage. If the container appears to be damaged, notify both the carrier and your Symmetricom distributor. Retain the shipping container and packing material for the carrier to inspect.

3. Open the container, being careful to cut only the packaging tape.

4. Locate and set aside the printed information and paperwork that is included in the container.

5. Remove the unit from the container and place it on an anti-static surface.

6. Locate and set aside small parts which may be packed in the container.

7. Remove the accessories from the container.

8. Remove the anti-static packaging from the unit and accessories.

9. Verify that the model and item number shown on the shipping list agrees with the model and item number on the equipment. The item number can be found on a label affixed to the TimeProvider. Contact your Symmetricom distributor if the model or item number do not match.

For a complete listing of TimeProvider item numbers and configuration options, contact your Symmetricom distributor.

Rack Mounting

The installation procedure described in this section provides general guidelines for installing the shelf and the optional Expansion panel and Cable Management tray.

Always follow applicable local electrical codes.

Main Shelf

The main shelf (Model 1000 and 1100) mounts to either a 19-inch or 23-inch rack using reversible mounting ears.

56

TimeProvider User’s Guide

097-58001-02 Revision G – April 2008

Chapter 3 Installing the TimeProvider

Rack Mounting

Expansion Panel

The optional Expansion panel uses a bracket to position the panel at the same depth as the shelf; expansion brackets are used for 23-inch racks.

Cable Management Tray

The optional Cable Management tray (093-55595-11) allows you to neatly bundle input and output cables from the rear-access TimeProvider Model 1100. A sample

installation with the cable management tray is shown in Figure 3-2 .

1. Attach the rack mounting ears to the shelf using 8-32 x 3/8-inch screws. Ensure that the ears are attached at equal distances from the front of the unit, as shown in

Figure 3-1 or

Figure 3-2 .

2. Mount the shelf to the front of the equipment rack rails with four screws and associated hardware. Use the proper screws for the equipment rack.

3. Mount the optional Expansion panel and/or Cable Management tray as shown in the following figures.

Figure 3-1.

Installing the Model 1000 Shelf, Expansion Panel, and Cable Management tray –

19-inch Rack

097-58001-02 Revision G – April 2008 TimeProvider User’s Guide

57

Chapter 3 Installing the TimeProvider

Rack Mounting

Figure 3-2.

Installing the Model 1100 Shelf, Cable Management tray, and Expansion Panel – 19-inch

Rack

58

TimeProvider User’s Guide

097-58001-02 Revision G – April 2008

Chapter 3 Installing the TimeProvider

Rack Mounting

Figure 3-3.

Installing the Model 1000 Shelf and Expansion Panel – 23-inch Rack

097-58001-02 Revision G – April 2008 TimeProvider User’s Guide

59

Chapter 3 Installing the TimeProvider

Making Connections

Figure 3-4.

Installing the Model 1100 Shelf and Expansion Panel – 23-inch Rack

Making Connections

Making Ground Connections

Use the procedure in this section for both the main shelf and the Expansion panel.

After installing the TimeProvider shelf and/or the Expansion panel into the rack, make the grounding connections as follows.

Recommendation: Although there are a number of methods for connecting the equipment to earth ground, Symmetricom recommends running a cable of the shortest possible length from the ground lug to earth ground.

Front Access Shelf

To connect Chassis Ground on the front access chassis, connect a cable from the frame ground lug on the left side of the front panel to the proper grounding zone or master ground bar.

Rear Access Shelf

To connect Chassis Ground on the rear access shelf, insert a grounding terminal block to one of the ground posts located on the lower left side at the rear of the shelf to the proper grounding zone or master ground bar.

60

TimeProvider User’s Guide

097-58001-02 Revision G – April 2008

Chapter 3 Installing the TimeProvider

Making Connections

Expansion Panel

All connections to the Expansion Panel, including chassis ground, are made using the interconnection cable.

Making Power Connections

Electrical Shock Caution: To avoid possible injury from shock, make sure that the fuses are removed from the fuse panel or power supply before connecting or applying power to the unit.

Warning: For continued fire protection, replace power supply fuse(s) with the specified type and a 5 A rating. There are no user-serviceable fuses in the TimeProvider shelf.

This unit must be grounded.

Refer all servicing to qualified personnel.

To install the TimeProvider power connections:

1. Assemble a power connector appropriate for the type of shelf.

Table 3-1

lists the pin-out for each type of connector.

Rear-access shelf: Crimp a No. 16 AWG (minimum) wire (1.31 mm

2

) to a spade lug, then slide the spade lug under the terminal and tighten.

Front-access shelf: Assemble the power connector as shown in Figure 3-6 .

Solder a No. 16 AWG (1.31 mm

2

) (minimum) wire to each pin. Slip the appropriate grommet over the wires, and screw the shell together.

2. Attach the connector to the Power A and Power B connectors on the shelf.

Table 3-1. Power Connections

Model 1100 Rear Access (NEBS) Shelf

Terminal Signal

48 Volt Negative Lead

48 Volt Positive Lead (return)

1

2

Model 1000 Front Access (ETSI) Shelf

Terminal Signal

Frame Ground

48 Volt Negative Lead

48 Volt Positive Lead (return)

1

2

3

097-58001-02 Revision G – April 2008 TimeProvider User’s Guide

61

Chapter 3 Installing the TimeProvider

Making Connections

Rear Access Shelf

Pin 1: -48 V DC Battery

Pin 2: -48 V DC RTN

Figure 3-5.

Power Terminal Connectors

Front Access Shelf

Pin 1: Frame ground

Pin 2: -48 V DC negative lead

Pin 3: Return

Figure 3-6.

Assembling the ETSI (Front Access) Power Connector

Expansion Panel

All connections to the Expansion Panel, including power, are made using the interconnection cable, part number 060-58002-03.

Verifying Power and Grounding Connections

To verify power and grounding connections:

1. Using a DVM, measure the voltage between pins 1 and 2 on the rear access

(NEBS) connector or between pins 2 and 3 of the front access (ETSI) connector.

2. Verify that voltage is –36 to –72 V DC. The inputs are protected against reverse polarity.

62

TimeProvider User’s Guide

097-58001-02 Revision G – April 2008

Chapter 3 Installing the TimeProvider

Making Connections

Making Input Connections

You connect the input signals to the TimeProvider using one of the Input modules

listed in Table 3-2

. Connect the Input module to the shelf before you attach cables.

Table 3-2. Input Connector Modules Available for the IOC

Item Number

090-58061-01

090-58061-02

090-58061-03

090-58061-04

090-58061-05

090-58061-06

Description

BNC Input module

Wire-wrap Input module

DB9 Input module

BT43 Input module

Metric (Siemens) 1.0/2.3

Input module

Metric (Siemens) 1.6/5.6

Input module

Alarm Connector

DB-25 (see

Table 3-6 )

Wire-wrap

DB-25 (see

Table 3-6 )

DB-25 (see

Table 3-6 )

DB-25 (see

Table 3-6 )

DB-25 (see

Table 3-6 )

Reference

Figure 3-7

Figure 3-8

Figure 3-9

Figure 3-10

Figure 3-11

Figure 3-11

Installing the Input Module

Attach the Input module to the shelf and secure it by tightening the screws on each side of the module.

Figure 3-7.

BNC Input Module

097-58001-02 Revision G – April 2008 TimeProvider User’s Guide

63

Chapter 3 Installing the TimeProvider

Making Connections

Figure 3-8.

Wire-Wrap Input Module

Figure 3-9.

DB9 Input Module

The pinout for the DB9 Input module is shown in Table 3-3

.

Table 3-3. Pinout for the DB9 Input Module

3

4

8

Pin Description

Chassis ground

Span Input Tip

Span Input Ring

64

TimeProvider User’s Guide

097-58001-02 Revision G – April 2008

Chapter 3 Installing the TimeProvider

Making Connections

Figure 3-10. BT43 Input Module

Figure 3-11. Metric (Siemens) Input Module

097-58001-02 Revision G – April 2008 TimeProvider User’s Guide

65

Chapter 3 Installing the TimeProvider

Making Connections

Making Output Connections

You make the output signal connections using one of the Output modules listed in

Table 3-4 . Attach the module to the shelf before you connect cables.

Table 3-4. Output Connector Modules

Item Number

090-58091-01

090-58091-02

090-58091-03

090-58091-07

090-58091-04

090-58091-05

090-58091-06

090-58071-02

Description

BNC Output module

Wire-wrap Output module

DB9 Output module – four connectors

DB9 Output module – eight connectors

SMZ/BT43 Output module

Metric (Siemens) 1.0/2.3 Output module

Metric (Siemens) 1.6/5.6 Output module

Wire-wrap TIA/EIA-B-422 Output module

Reference

Figure 3-12

Figure 3-12

Figure 3-13

Figure 3-13

Figure 3-14

Figure 3-14

Figure 3-14

Figure 3-15

Installing the Output Module

Attach the Output module to the shelf and secure it using the screws at the top and bottom of the module.

Table 3-5

lists the pinout for the DB9 four-connector Output module (090-58091-03), and the DB9 eight-connector Output module (090-58091-07) which are shown in

Figure 3-13

.

Table 3-5. Pinout for the DB9 Output Module

4-Connector Output Module

Pin

1

2

4, 5, and 6

8

9

Description

Port A Tip

Port A Ring

Chassis Ground

Port B Tip

Port B Ring

8-Connector Output Module

1

2

6

3, 4, 5

7, 8, 9

Pin Description

Chassis Ground

Tip (or Ring)

Ring (or Tip)

Not used

Not used

66

TimeProvider User’s Guide

097-58001-02 Revision G – April 2008

Chapter 3 Installing the TimeProvider

Making Connections

Figure 3-12. BNC and Wire-Wrap Output Modules

Figure 3-13. DB9 Output Modules

097-58001-02 Revision G – April 2008 TimeProvider User’s Guide

67

Chapter 3 Installing the TimeProvider

Making Connections

Figure 3-14. BT43 and Metric (Siemens) Output Modules

Figure 3-15. B-422 Output Module

68

TimeProvider User’s Guide

097-58001-02 Revision G – April 2008

Chapter 3 Installing the TimeProvider

Making Connections

Making Retimer Connections

The front panel of the E1 Retimer module and T1 Retimer module (shown in

Figure 3-16

) indicates the input and output connections for a typical installation.

Side 1 of the Retimer provides 3R (Re-shape, Re-amplify, and Re-time) for the E1 or T1 signal to a client Network Element.

Figure 3-16. Front Panel of the T1 (wire-wrap) and E1 (BNC) Retimer Modules

Figure 3-17

illustrates a sample schematic for connecting a Retimer connected to both sides of a DSX-1 panel in a Central Office.

Figure 3-17. Sample Installation Schematic for a Retimer

097-58001-02 Revision G – April 2008 TimeProvider User’s Guide

69

Chapter 3 Installing the TimeProvider

Making Connections

Making Alarm Connections

To install alarm connections on the Input Module, use a customer-supplied DB-25 connector to build an alarm connection to the TimeProvider.

Table 3-6 lists the

pinout for the DB-25 Alarm connector found on all the Input modules (except the wire-wrap version).

Table 3-6. Alarm Connector Pinout

13

14

15

16

9

10

11

12

7

8

5

6

3

4

1

2

21

22

23

24

25

17

18

19

20

Pin Description

No Connection

Minor Normally Closed (NC) Audible

Minor Common Audible

Minor NC Visual

Minor Common Visual

Major NC Audible

Major Common Audible

Major NC Visual

Major Common Visual

Critical NC Audible

Critical Common Audible

Critical NC Visual

Critical Common Visual

Ground

Minor Normally Open (NO) Audible

Critical PRS Input NO

Minor NO Visual

Critical PRS Input Common

Major NO Audible

Major PRS Input NO

Major NO Visual

Major PRS Input Common

Critical NO Audible

No Connection

Critical NO Visible

70

TimeProvider User’s Guide

097-58001-02 Revision G – April 2008

Pin 1

Chapter 3 Installing the TimeProvider

Making Connections

Pin 25

Figure 3-18. DB-25 Alarm Connector (Front View)

Making GPS Connections

To connect a GPS signal to the TimeProvider, you must install a GPS antenna with either the standalone TimeProvider Interface Unit (TPIU) and an IMC or the integrated IMC/TPIU card using the procedures in this section.

Installing the GPS Antenna

These installation procedures are to be used in support of local company procedures and the Installation Job Specification.

Prior to installing the antenna, you should plan the site, antenna location, lightning suppressor location, cable route, and all other details. Use

Figure 3-19

as a guide to locating the antenna.

Figure 3-19. Locating the GPS Antenna

To install the antenna, refer to Figure 3-20 , and perform the procedure in this

section. Ensure all user-supplied materials are available. The maximum distance between the antenna and the shelf is 1000 feet (304 m).

097-58001-02 Revision G – April 2008 TimeProvider User’s Guide

71

Chapter 3 Installing the TimeProvider

Making Connections

Warning: To prevent arcing, ensure that the lightning suppressor is installed away from electrical devices and cabling.

Warning: To prevent possible damage to the TimeProvider, use only the lightning suppressor supplied with the antenna kit.

Note: Use the following antenna installation instructions as a guideline only. Install the antenna using company-approved techniques, and follow all appropriate local building and electrical codes.

Note: To achieve optimum results, the TimeProvider GPS rooftop antenna requires a minimum cable length of 8 meters (27 feet) from the antenna to the TimeProvider system; this overall length includes the cable section to the lightning suppressor.

Recommendation: Symmetricom recommends that you use one of the following grounding points:

Valid roof ring ground system.

Cad weld to building structural steel.

Central office ground plate within 15 m of antenna cable entrance into building.

Order two cables, or a single cable run can be made from the antenna to the TimeProvider shelf. The cable can then be cut at the lightning suppressor location, and TNC connectors attached to the cut ends of the cable. The “xx” in the part number indicates the cable length.

72

TimeProvider User’s Guide

097-58001-02 Revision G – April 2008

Chapter 3 Installing the TimeProvider

Making Connections

Figure 3-20. Antenna-to-Shelf Cabling

To install the antenna:

1. Attach the antenna mounting bracket to a 1-inch (2.5 cm) diameter pipe or wood post.

– If you are mounting the bracket to a pipe, assemble as shown in

Figure 3-21 . Slide the two V-bolts over the pipe, and through the mounting

bracket slots; then place the provided four washers and four nuts over the

V-bolts, against the mounting bracket. Leave the V-bolts loose enough to allow for final adjustments.

097-58001-02 Revision G – April 2008 TimeProvider User’s Guide

73

Chapter 3 Installing the TimeProvider

Making Connections

Figure 3-21. Installing the Antenna Bracket on a Pipe

– If you are mounting the bracket to a wood post, assemble as shown in

Figure 3-22 . Install the provided two self-tapping screws in two diagonally

positioned mounting bracket slots, and attach to the post.

Figure 3-22. Installing the Antenna Bracket on a Post

Mount the antenna and mast assembly to the “L” bracket.

2. Connect the mast to the flange using PVC glue.

3. Feed an RG58 (060-58545-xx) cable through the bottom of the mast as illustrated.

See Table 2-4 for specific cable lengths.

4. Connect the cable to the antenna “pigtail” and pull the cable back through the mast.

5. Mount the antenna to the mast.

74

TimeProvider User’s Guide

097-58001-02 Revision G – April 2008

Chapter 3 Installing the TimeProvider

Making Connections

6. Mount the antenna and mast assembly to the “L” bracket using the supplied nuts,

bolts, and washers, as shown in Figure 3-23

.

Figure 3-23. Attaching the Antenna to the Bracket

7. Using a plumb line or bubble level, ensure the antenna is within 5° of vertical

(perpendicular to the horizon), and tighten the mounting bracket bolts.

8. Bolt the lightning suppressor mounting plate to a flange that is attached to a valid earth ground. The roof ring ground system, a Central Office grounding plate, and building structural steel are examples of valid earth ground points. If the mounting plate cannot be bolted to a valid earth ground, bolt the mounting plate to a point within 15 feet (4.6 m) of the chosen valid earth ground. If the mounting plate is to be installed in a nonmetallic junction box, perform the installation and bolt the assembly near the chosen valid earth ground.

097-58001-02 Revision G – April 2008 TimeProvider User’s Guide

75

Chapter 3 Installing the TimeProvider

Making Connections

Note: A junction box must have inside dimensions of at least 7 cm by

7 cm by 4 cm to hold the mounting plate and attached components.

9. Assemble the lightning suppressor as shown in Figure 3-24 .

Figure 3-24. Assembling the Lightning Suppressor

10.Install 1.5 inch (3.8 cm) nonmetallic conduit from the antenna to the lightning suppressor, and from the lightning suppressor to the cable entrance into the building.

11.Install a user-supplied bracket, preferably non-metallic, to support the vertical section of conduit to the antenna.

12.Route the antenna cable through the conduit, and connect the cable to the lightning suppressor. See

Table 2-4 for specific cable lengths.

13.If the lightning suppressor is not mounted directly to a valid earth ground, crimp a length of 4.115 mm (6 AWG) ground cable to the two-hole terminal, slide the terminal over any two of the three threaded posts on the lightning suppressor mounting plate, and attach the terminal to the mounting plate with two KEPS nuts. Use the two posts that allow the least bending of the cable.

76

TimeProvider User’s Guide

097-58001-02 Revision G – April 2008

Chapter 3 Installing the TimeProvider

Making Connections

14.Connect an RG58 (060-58545-xx) cable between the lightning suppressor and

the TPIU. See Table 2-4

for specific cable lengths.

If you are using the integrated IMC/TPIU, install the appropriate converter cable

(060-58041-03, 1 m/3 ft, right angle connector or 060-58042-03, 1 m/3 ft, straight connector) to the DB15 GPS connector on the main shelf. Connect the other end of the converter cable to the RG58 cable from the lightning suppressor.

15.Install fire-stopping material in all holes opened in the roof and/or walls during this procedure.

16.Check all connections for tightness to prevent arcing and intermittent operation.

17.Coat all exposed connectors with an electrically conductive antioxidant compound (e.g. Kopr-Shield spray).

Installing the Integrated IMC/TPIU

You install the integrated IMC/TPIU in the IMC slot in either TimeProvider main shelf, as shown in

Figure 1-4

. Use the installation procedure described in Replacing the IMC or IMC/TPIU , on page 163.

Installing the TPIU

You mount the TPIU on a rack near the TimeProvider main shelf. Symmetricom supplies the connecting cable (060-58543-xx or 060-58544-xx) in several lengths,

as listed in Table 2-4

. The Integrated GPS Antenna kit (990-58545-01 or

990-58545-02) is delivered with a 1m/3 ft. interconnect cable. Mount the TPIU to the rear rails of the rack using the provided rack ears. Install the TPIU so that the front

panel is on the same side as the Output modules. Figure 3-25 and Figure 3-26

illustrate alternate mounting schemes.

To connect the TPIU to the shelf, attach the DB15 interconnect cable (060-58543-03 or 060-58544-03) to the connector labeled “GPS” on the TimeProvider shelf. This connector is on the front panel of the Model 1000 and on the rear panel of the Model

1100. Connect the other end of the cable to the DB15 connector on the TPIU.

To use the GPS signal, set the TimeProvider to the PRR mode, as described in

Provisioning the IOC , on page 105, or enable the GPS input when in SSU mode.

097-58001-02 Revision G – April 2008 TimeProvider User’s Guide

77

Chapter 3 Installing the TimeProvider

Making Connections

Figure 3-25. Mounting the TPIU and Expansion Panel on the Same Rack Ears

Figure 3-26. Mounting the TPIU with a Model 1000 ETSI-Style Shelf

78

TimeProvider User’s Guide

097-58001-02 Revision G – April 2008

Chapter 3 Installing the TimeProvider

Making Connections

Making Communications Connections

The TimeProvider has one Ethernet and two serial ports available. The Ethernet connector is on the front panel of the Front Access shelf and on the rear panel of the

Rear Access shelf; the local Craft serial port is on the faceplate of the IMC or

IMC/TPIU, and the Remote port is on the shelf.

The local Craft serial port is used for control and monitoring of the unit, and is configured as a DCE device. The Remote port can be used for remote dial-in connection to the unit, and is configured as a DTE device.

Connecting to the Local Craft and Remote Serial Ports

To connect a device to the local Craft or the Remote serial port, perform the following steps:

1. Connect a 9-pin serial cable to the desired port.

2. Connect the other end of the cable to the serial port of the PC or terminal device.

Use the procedure described in

Starting the TimeProvider for the First Time , on page 88, to connect to the TimeProvider.

The default settings for the local Craft serial port are DCE, 9600 Baud, 8 bits, no

parity, 1 stop bit, echo on, and handshaking disabled. Table 3-7

lists the signal connections for the serial ports.

Table 3-7. Connector Pinouts for the Serial Ports

Local Craft Connector

Signal

Local CD

Local RD (Received Data)

Local TD (Transmitted Data)

Local DTR (Data Terminal Ready)

Ground

Local DSR (Data Set Ready)

Local RTS (Request to Send)

Local CTS (Clear to Send)

Local RI (Ring Indicator)

Pin

7

8

5

6

9

3

4

1

2

Remote Connector

Signal

CD

RD

TD

DTR

GND

DCE

RTS

CTS

RI

Pin

8

7

5

4

9

2

6

1

3

The default settings for the Remote serial port are DTE, 9600 Baud, 8 bits, 1 stop bit, no parity (also known as 8-1-N), echo on, and handshaking disabled. The local port settings revert to factory default values when you reset the IMC.

097-58001-02 Revision G – April 2008 TimeProvider User’s Guide

79

Chapter 3 Installing the TimeProvider

Installing Connections to the Ethernet Port

Changing Communications Settings

To change the communication settings for the local or remote serial ports:

1. Connect a PC or laptop with terminal emulation software, such as Windows

®

Hilgraeve HyperTerminal

©

or ProComm Plus

to the port and log in. For a complete description of this procedure, see

Setting Communications

Parameters , on page 91 .

2. Use the ED-EQPT command to change the communications settings for the port as required. See

Setting Communications Parameters , on page 91, and also

refer to the TimeProvider TL1 Reference Guide for a description of TL1 commands.

Installing Connections to the Ethernet Port

You can connect a PC or terminal to the TimeProvider using the LAN connector for local monitoring or control, or you can connect the TimeProvider to a network for monitoring and control from a remote site.

Note: The TimeProvider can be controlled through a TCP/IP network connection, but before you can use it, you must configure the Ethernet settings using a serial connection. Refer to

Setting Ethernet Parameters , on page 93.

Direct Ethernet Connection

You use a direct Ethernet connection when a service technician is on-site. You must configure the Ethernet settings using TL1 commands over a serial connection before you can use the Ethernet connection. Use the direct connection to troubleshoot a LAN connection.

To connect the TimeProvider to a PC or terminal, perform the following steps:

1. Connect an RJ-45 Ethernet crossover cable to the LAN connector on the shelf.

2. Connect the other end of the cable to the PC or terminal.

3. Start a terminal emulation program such as HyperTerminal or ProComm Plus.

Configure the program for a telnet session and enter the IP address of the

TimeProvider. Use Port 5000 to connect.

4. Type

;

(semicolon). If the TimeProvider responds with a Deny response, you have established communications. If you do not receive the Deny response, check the connections, the cable, and the program settings.

80

TimeProvider User’s Guide

097-58001-02 Revision G – April 2008

Chapter 3 Installing the TimeProvider

Installing Connections to the Ethernet Port

Network Connection

You can use a network connection for routine monitoring and control of the

TimeProvider from a remote site. Perform the following steps to connect the

TimeProvider to a network.

1. Connect one end of an RJ-45 cable to the LAN outlet. Connect the other end of the cable to the LAN connector on the TimeProvider.

2. To connect the PC or laptop to the LAN, connect one end of the RJ-45 cable to the Ethernet port of the PC or laptop. Connect the other end of the cable to the

LAN outlet.

3. Use a remote monitoring software application such as SynCraft or TimePictra to

connect to and monitor the TimeProvider. See Appendix B, CRAFT Software

Reference

, for more information on installing and using SynCraft.

Table 3-8 lists the Ethernet communications port signal connections.

Table 3-8. Ethernet Communications Port Signal Connections

Name

TX+ (Positive Side of Transmitted Data)

TX- (Negative Side of Transmitted Data)

RX+ (Positive Side of Received Data)

Not Used

Not Used

RX- (Negative Side of Received Data)

Not Used

Not Used

Pin

5

6

7

8

1

2

3

4

097-58001-02 Revision G – April 2008 TimeProvider User’s Guide

81

Chapter 3 Installing the TimeProvider

Installation Check List

Installation Check List

To verify that the installation of the TimeProvider is complete, perform the following

checks and procedures in Table 3-9

.

Table 3-9. Installation Completeness Checklist

Operation/Indication

Verify that all power and ground wires are installed correctly and securely.

Verify that all communications cables are properly installed.

Verify that all input and output cables are properly installed.

Complete

Powering Up the Shelf

There is no power switch on the TimeProvider. When you apply power to the unit, it enters the warm-up state. See

Starting the TimeProvider for the First Time , on page

88, for more information on powering up the shelf.

Working With Cards

This section describes how to install, remove, and handle the cards associated with the TimeProvider.

Properly Handling Cards

When handling any of the cards, observe the following precautions:

Use proper static control precautions when handling cards! Protect the equipment against ESD (electrostatic discharge) by using a grounded protective wrist strap and normal equipment grounding.

Avoid touching component leads and edge connectors.

Avoid placing the card on an ungrounded surface.

Avoid allowing the card to come in contact with insulated surfaces.

82

TimeProvider User’s Guide

097-58001-02 Revision G – April 2008

Chapter 3 Installing the TimeProvider

Working With Cards

Inserting Cards

This procedure is common for all cards.

Note: Cards can be removed and inserted while system power is supplied without damaging modules; however, system performance may be affected.

Caution: For continued EMC compliance, replace all deformed module gaskets with the same type. Clean gaskets and mating surfaces. Secure all cards with captive screws.

To insert a card into the shelf:

1. Align the card edges within the guides of the selected slot.

2. Slide the card into the chassis and press firmly until it seats fully into its backplane edge connector.

3. Tighten the captive screws located on each side of the panel.

Caution: To avoid possible damage or intermittent failures, ensure that you have completely inserted the card into the chassis and that you have securely tightened the captive screws.

Removing Cards

To remove an IOC, lift the tabs on the front panel and slide it out of the shelf. Be sure to place the card on a static-free surface.

To remove the IMC or IMC/TPIU, loosen the captive screws and pull on the

U-shaped handle.

To remove the Input, or Output modules, loosen and then pull out on the captive screws.

097-58001-02 Revision G – April 2008 TimeProvider User’s Guide

83

Chapter 3 Installing the TimeProvider

Firmware Features

Firmware Features

Table 3-10 describes the features provided in recent releases of the operating

firmware for the IOC and IMC.

Table 3-10. Firmware Feature Matrix

IMC Release

1.01.04

1.02.01

1.03.03

1.04.02

1.04.02

1.05.04

IOC Release

1.01.02

1.02.12

1.03.04

1.04.02

1.04.06

1.05.00

Features Added

E1/T1/2.048 MHz signals

Quartz IOC

SSMs

GPS

Rubidium IOC

Japanese input/output signals

Composite Clock signals

T1 Retimer

Input/output port labeling

Enhanced event log management

NTP

TIA/EIA-B-422 output signals

Integrated IMC with TPIU

(IMC/TPIU)

Programmable E1 SSM bit position

Programmable CAS/CCS framing on inputs and outputs

E1 Retimer

8-Port DB9 Output module

Improved Pull-in/Hold-in range

SNMP

84

TimeProvider User’s Guide

097-58001-02 Revision G – April 2008

Chapter 4 Provisioning the TimeProvider

This chapter describes the procedures for provisioning the TimeProvider and the available Expansion Panel. Use the procedures in this chapter after you have installed the TimeProvider (see

Chapter 3, Installing the TimeProvider ).

For detailed information on the syntax and format for each available TL1 command, refer to the TimeProvider TL1 Reference Guide, part number 097-58001-01.

In This Chapter

TL1 Overview

Starting the TimeProvider for the First Time

Setting Communications Parameters

Defining the Security Parameters

Managing the User List

Using SynCraft

Provisioning the IOC

Provisioning the Input Reference

Provisioning the Outputs

Provisioning NTP Parameters

Provisioning Alarms

Provisioning SNMP Parameters

System Commands

Saving Provisioning Data

097-58001-02 Revision G – April 2008 TimeProvider User’s Guide

85

Chapter 4 Provisioning the TimeProvider

TL1 Overview

TL1 Overview

The TimeProvider uses the TL1 syntax; this chapter and the TimeProvider TL1

Reference Guide describes command lines and responses. For a complete description of the TL1 syntax, refer to Telcordia (Bellcore) Technical Reference

TR-NWT-00831 and TR-NWT-00833.

TL1 Command Structure

The TL1 commands you issue to the TimeProvider use the following structure: verb-modifier:|tid|:|aid|:[<ctag>]::|<keyword>|=<value||; where:

: (colon) is a block separator

, (comma) is a parameter field separator

; (semicolon) is the terminating character for commands and responses

[ ] (square brackets) indicate optional parameters

Adjacent colons indicate unused fields. If an unused field is the last parameter in the list, for example the general block or the parameter block, you can omit the colon and simply type the semicolon.

If you enter a space in the command string, the TimeProvider ignores it.

TL1 commands are not case-sensitive.

Table 4-1 describes the syntax used in this manual.

Table 4-1. TL1 Syntax Conventions

Symbol

^

<cr>

<lf>

[ ... ]

< ... >

( ... )

Description

Space character (ASCII 0x20)

Carriage return (ASCII 0x0D)

Line feed (ASCII 0x0A)

Optional command parameter or data

ASCII characters sent in commands or returned in response

Numeric data that can be positive or negative

86

TimeProvider User’s Guide

097-58001-02 Revision G – April 2008

Chapter 4 Provisioning the TimeProvider

TL1 Overview

TL1 Response Format

Normal Response

For each TL1 command described in this chapter there is a normal response, an in-process response, or an error response. The TimeProvider response is always upper-case. The format of a normal response is:

<cr><lf><lf>

^^^sid^date^time<cr><lf>

M ^ctag^COMPLD<cr><lf>

;

The time and date is in the Telcordia GR-833 format. A sample normal response is:

TIMEPROVIDER 03-08-28 11:23:54

M 1 COMPLD

;

In-Process Response

The TimeProvider sends an in-process response only if it cannot respond to the command within two seconds. The response terminates with a less-than character

(<) with no semicolon until after the TimeProvider sends the requested output response message. The format of the in-process message is:

<cr><lf><lf>

^^^sid^date^time<cr><lf>

IP^ctag<cr><lf>

<

A sample in-process response is:

TIMEPROVIDER 03-08-28 11:24:15

IP^2

<

Error Response

If you mis-type a command or issue an invalid command, the TimeProvider sends an error message. The format of the error response is:

<cr><lf><lf>

^^^sid^date^time<cr><lf>

M ^ctag^DENY<cr><lf>

^^^<errcde><cr><lf>

;

A sample error message is shown below:

TIMEPROVIDER 08-28-03 11:32:12

M 3 DENY

ICNV

;

097-58001-02 Revision G – April 2008 TimeProvider User’s Guide

87

Chapter 4 Provisioning the TimeProvider

Starting the TimeProvider for the First Time

The TL1 command may generate an event message specific to the command. This event message accompanies the command description in this chapter.

Autonomous Messages

In addition to the TL1 response messages described in the above sections, the

TimeProvider returns Autonomous Messages to report alarms, configuration changes, or condition changes. Frequently, an Autonomous Message is returned at approximately the same time as the TL1 response message that is associated with a command, because the command happens to change the unit’s state.

Autonomous Messages are not directly correlated with commands, and therefore they do not contain a correlation tag (ctag).

The TimeProvider can generate an Autonomous Message at any time, whether to report that a user-initiated change has occurred, to report that an active alarm condition exists, or to report that an alarm has been cleared. The format of the

Autonomous message is as follows; note that the text REPT identifies the response as a Autonomous Message.

<cr><lf><lf> sid date time <cr><lf> almcde atag REPT reptype aidtype<cr><lf> aid,aditype:ntfcncde,condtype,srveff,ocrdat,ocrtim:condscr

”<cr><lf>

;

Refer to the TimeProvider TL1 Reference Guide for more information on

Autonomous Messages.

Starting the TimeProvider for the First Time

The TimeProvider is delivered with a copy of SynCraft, Symmetricom’s network management application. Before you can use SynCraft or other network management software, you must provision the following parameters, as described in this section and in

Setting Communications Parameters , on page 91:

Source ID (sid)

Date and time

Ethernet parameters

Security-level user

Appendix B, CRAFT Software Reference

, provides procedures and instructions to get started using the SynCraft application.

88

TimeProvider User’s Guide

097-58001-02 Revision G – April 2008

Chapter 4 Provisioning the TimeProvider

Starting the TimeProvider for the First Time

Powering Up the TimeProvider

To power up the TimeProvider, perform one of the following tasks, as appropriate:

Connect the power leads from the power supply (see Making Power

Connections , on page 61)

Install the fuse in the fuse panel

Turn on the power supply

LED Indications on Power-up

The LEDs on the IMC, IOC, and TPIU (if present) illuminate in the following sequence:

The LEDs on the TPIU remain off until the Master shelf has completed its power-on testing and the GPS input has been enabled. The TPIU and Antenna Power LEDs light green and the Antenna Signal LED lights red. When the Master shelf completes its power-on testing, the Antenna Signal LED lights green, indicating that the TPIU is receiving a valid signal from the antenna.

Logging In for the First Time

To log in to the TimeProvider for the first time, you must create a username and password using the TL1 commands described below. Once you create a username and password, you can connect to the TimeProvider using the SynCraft application

as described in Using SynCraft , on page 102, or using the TL1 commands in this

section.

1. Connect a straight-through DB-9-to-DB-9 serial cable to the local Craft port located on the front panel of the IMC or IMC/TPIU card. Connect the other end of the cable to a computer.

2. Start a terminal emulation program such as HyperTerminal or ProComm Plus.

Configure the program for 9600 baud, 8 data bits, No parity, and 1 stop bit, which are the TimeProvider’s default communication parameter values.

3. Type

;

(semicolon). If the TimeProvider responds with a Deny response, you have established communications. If you do not receive the Deny response, check the connections, the cable, and the program settings.

Changing the Echo Mode

To view the keystrokes you enter in the terminal emulation program, you need to set the Echo mode to Enable. Issue the following command:

ED-EQPT::COML:TS1000::ECHO=ENABLE;

The TimeProvider responds with:

TIMEPROVIDER 07-08-24 10:15:04

M TS1000 COMPLD

;

097-58001-02 Revision G – April 2008 TimeProvider User’s Guide

89

Chapter 4 Provisioning the TimeProvider

Starting the TimeProvider for the First Time

This command is described in detail in

Changing the Echo Mode , on page 89.

Setting the Source ID <sid>

Use the SET-SID command to change the name of the TimeProvider. This name appears in normal and error response messages sent by the unit. The default is

TimeProvider.

SET-SID:::TS1000::SIDCHG=TP-SSU;

This command sets the <sid> to TP-SSU. Symmetricom recommends that you use unique names for each TimeProvider in the network. Record the name you chose for the TimeProvider in

Table 4-4

.

If you include the “_” (underscore) character in the name, then the TimeProvider returns the SID in quote marks.

The TimeProvider responds with:

TP-SSU 07-08-24,10:22:03

A 1167 REPT EVT

“IMC,EQPT:NA,SIDCHG,NSA,07-08-24,10-22-03:\”SYSTEM’S

SOURCE ID HAS CHANGED,TP-SSU\””

;

Setting the Response Format

Release 3.2 of the TimeProvider provides two formats for the autonomous and response messages: Legacy and GR833. Use the following TL1 command to set the response format to GR833:

ED-EQPT::SYS:TS1000::EVTFORMAT=GR833;

The TimeProvider responds with:

TP-SSU 07-08-24,10:24:13

A 1167 REPT EVT

“SYS,BROADCAST,TC,07-08-24,10-24-13:\”AUTONOMOUS MESSAGE

FORMAT HAS CHANGED,GR833\””

;

Setting the Date and Time

Use the following TL1 command to set the date and time in the IMC.

ED-DAT::SYS:TS1000::DATCHG=07-08-24;

The TimeProvider responds with:

TP-SSU 07-08-24 10:25:28

A 1168 REPT EVT

SYS,EQPT:NA,DATCHG,NSA,03-10-24,10-25-28:\"SYSTEM DATE

HAS CHANGED,2007-08-24\””

;

90

TimeProvider User’s Guide

097-58001-02 Revision G – April 2008

Chapter 4 Provisioning the TimeProvider

Setting Communications Parameters

Setting Ethernet Parameters

Set up the Ethernet port, if you are using it, by following the procedure in Setting

Ethernet Parameters , on page 93.

Setting User Security

Set up the user security (usernames and passwords), if you are using it, by

following the procedure in Defining the Security Parameters , on page 94.

Setting Communications Parameters

If you want to change the communications parameter values, use the ED-EQPT command. The following sections describe the commands for performing each individual task. For detailed information on the ED-EQPT command, see the

TimeProvider TL1 Reference Guide. Record the values you provision in

Table 4-4

.

Setting RS-232 Parameters

This section describes how to set the baud rate, the handshaking mode, and echo modes on the local and remote ports. The default values are 9600 baud, No flow control, echo mode disabled, tidquiet disabled.

Setting the Baud Rate

Use the ED-EQPT command to provision the baud rate on the Local or Remote port.

ED-EQPT:[<tid>]:<aid>:[<ctag>]::<keyword>=<value>;

This command has a default access level of ADMIN.

<aid>

COMp p = L | R

<keyword>

BAUD

<value> Description

2400 | 9600 | 19200 |

28800 | 38400 | 57600 |

115200

Baud rate

Default value

9600

Sample Command

ED-EQPT::COML:TS1000::BAUD=9600;

This command sets the local Craft communications port to 9600 baud.

Normal Response

TIMEPROVIDER 03-10-24 10:10:25

M TS1000 COMPLD

;

097-58001-02 Revision G – April 2008 TimeProvider User’s Guide

91

Chapter 4 Provisioning the TimeProvider

Setting Communications Parameters

Setting the Handshaking (Flow) Mode

Use the ED-EQPT command to provision the handshaking mode on the local Craft or Remote port to None, Hardware, Software, or Hardware/Software.

ED-EQPT:[<tid>]:<aid>:[<ctag>]::<keyword>=<value>;

This command has a default access level of ADMIN.

<aid>

COMp p = L | R

<keyword>

FLOW

<value>

NONE | SW |

HW | SWHW

Description

Flow control

Default value

NONE

Sample Command

ED-EQPT::COML:TS1000::FLOW=HW;

Normal Response

TIMEPROVIDER 03-10-24 10:12:33

M TS1000 COMPLD

;

Setting the Echo Mode

Use the ED-EQPT command to provision the echo mode on the local Craft or

Remote port to On or Off. When set to ENABLE, characters you type at the keyboard also appear on the monitor. If one keystroke generates two characters on the monitor, set this parameter to DISABLE.

You can also use ED-EQPT to echo the <tid> in the response from the TimeProvider.

ED-EQPT:[<tid>]:<aid>:[<ctag>]::<keyword>[=<value>];

This command has a default access level of ADMIN.

<aid>

COMp p = L | R

<keyword>

ECHO

TIDQUIET

<value>

ENABLE | DISABLE

ENABLE | DISABLE

Description Default value

Input echo

Enables or disables the echo of the <tid>. This is a session setting.

DISABLE

DISABLE

Sample Command

ED-EQPT::COML:TS1000::ECHO=ENABLE;

Normal Response

TIMEPROVIDER 03-10-24 10:15:04

M TS1000 COMPLD

;

92

TimeProvider User’s Guide

097-58001-02 Revision G – April 2008

Chapter 4 Provisioning the TimeProvider

Setting Communications Parameters

Setting Ethernet Parameters

Before you can begin using the Ethernet port, you must provision the addresses using the local Craft or Remote serial port.

Note: To avoid unexpected interruptions in NTP service, you must restart the IMC card after you change either the Subnet Mask or the

IP Address when NTP is active.

If you are not planning to use the Ethernet port, you do not have to provision the parameters in this section.

Setting the IP Addresses

Use the ED-EQPT command to provision the following IP addresses for the

TimeProvider:

IP Gateway address

IP address

IP subnet Mask

ED-EQPT:[<tid>]:<aid>:[<ctag>]::<keyword>=<value>;

This command has a default access level of ADMIN.

<aid>

COMI

<keyword>

IPGATE

IPADDR

IPSUBNET

<value>

1.0.0.1

254.255.255.254

1.0.0.1

254.255.255.254

1.0.0.1

255.255.255.254

Description Default

IP address of the default gateway 127.0.0.1

IP address of the Network

Element

Subnet mask IP address

127.0.0.1

255.255.

255.0

Sample Command

ED-EQPT::COMI:TS1000::IPGATE=127.0.0.1;

This command sets the IP Gate address to 127.0.0.1. Use an appropriate gateway address for your network, and record the address in

Table 4-4 .

Autonomous Message

TP-SSU 03-10-24 10:15:04

A 1169 REPT EVT

“COMI:NA,IPGATE,NSA,03-10-24 10-15-04:\”IP GATEWAY

ADDRESS HAS CHANGED\””

;

097-58001-02 Revision G – April 2008 TimeProvider User’s Guide

93

Chapter 4 Provisioning the TimeProvider

Defining the Security Parameters

Checking Communication Links

Two commands allow you to check the communication links from a computer or network to the TimeProvider: PING and RTRV-HDR.

Ping

Use the PING command to check an Ethernet connection to the TimeProvider.

PING:[<tid>]::[<ctag>]::<ipaddr>;

This command has a default access level of USER.

<ipaddr> Value Description

IP address of host to be pinged 1.0.0.1 – 254.254.254.254

Pings the host system

Sample Command

PING:::TS1000::192.168.12.10;

Normal Response

TP-SSU 03-05-15 09:59:09

M TS1000 COMPLD

“Host 192.168.12.10 is alive. Roundtrip time was 165 ms”

;

Retrieve Header

Use the RTRV-HDR command to display the response header, which includes the system identification <sid>, date, and time. You can also use this command to verify that the communication link to the TimeProvider is working properly.

This command has a default access level of NONE.

Sample Command

RTRV-HDR:::TS1000;

Normal Response

TP-SSU 03-05-15 09:59:25

M TS1000 COMPLD

;

Defining the Security Parameters

The TimeProvider supports users at the following four access levels:

None – Anyone with access to a serial or Ethernet port on the TimeProvider can issue commands set to this access level. If no Security-level users are defined, then anyone connected to the TimeProvider can issue every command available

94

TimeProvider User’s Guide

097-58001-02 Revision G – April 2008

Chapter 4 Provisioning the TimeProvider

Defining the Security Parameters

User – Users entered into the user list at the User level can issue commands set at the User access level

Admin – Users entered into the user list at the Admin level can issue commands set at the Admin access level

Security – Users at this access level can issue every command available

You can edit the commands available at each access level using the ED-CMD-

SECU command. You can display the current access level for each command by issuing the RTRV-CMD-SECU command. See the TimeProvider TL1 Reference

Guide for details on these commands. Record the values you provision in Table 4-4 .

The first person to log into the TimeProvider is automatically assigned the Security

access level (described in Defining a User at the Security Access Level , on page

95); this person normally performs the initial provisioning and defines users and

their appropriate access levels.

Defining a User at the Security Access Level

Recommendation: To avoid a possible service call to unlock the

TimeProvider, Symmetricom recommends that you enable the security feature by defining a user at the Security access level.

TimeProvider Access Levels

The security measures built into the TimeProvider are based on a list of users authorized to access the unit. Each user has their own password and is assigned to one of the following access levels: NONE, USER, ADMIN, or SECURITY. Users can

issue the TL1 commands available at their access level. Managing the User List , on page 96, describes how to manage the user list.

If you do not define a Security-level user, the security features are not enabled and an unauthorized user could gain access to the TimeProvider and compromise the security of your network.

Note: The factory default security setting is None, which allows all users to access the system.

If you define a user at a level other than Security before you define a Security-level user, you cannot execute Security-level commands. You will need to contact

Symmetricom Global Services (see

Obtaining Technical Assistance , on page 187)

to correct this problem.

Recommendation: Symmetricom recommends that you record and store the Security-level user’s name and password in a secure location.

097-58001-02 Revision G – April 2008 TimeProvider User’s Guide

95

Chapter 4 Provisioning the TimeProvider

Managing the User List

Adding a User at the Security Access Level

To define a user at the Security access level, issue the following TL1 command. The user and password you create is the same user and password used to access the

TimeProvider using the SynCraft application (see

Using SynCraft , on page 102).

Sample Command

ENT-USER-SECU::DEPTHEAD:TS1000::TP01!,SECURITY;

This sample command creates a user with the name DEPTHEAD and a password of TP01!; this user is at the Security access level. See

Adding a User , on page 98,

for more information on the ENT-USER-SECU command.

Autonomous Message

TP-SSU 03-05-15 09:59:09

A 1166 REPT EVT

“IMC:NA,USRADD,NSA,03-05-15,09-59-09:\”USER HAS BEEN ADDED\””

;

Logging In

You can now log in using the ACT-USER command and the new user name and password to continue with the provisioning process.

Sample Command

ACT-USER::DEPTHEAD:TS1000::TP01!;

Normal Response

TP-SSU 03-05-15 09:59:15

M TS1000 COMPLD

;

Users with the Security access level can issue any of the TL1 commands described in this chapter and in the TimeProvider TL1 Reference Guide.

Managing the User List

Use the procedures in this section to manage the users that are authorized to access the TimeProvider.

Logging In

Use the following TL1 command to log existing users into the system.

ACT-USER:[<tid>]:<uid>:[<ctag>]::<pid>;

This command has a default access level of NONE.

96

TimeProvider User’s Guide

097-58001-02 Revision G – April 2008

Chapter 4 Provisioning the TimeProvider

Managing the User List

Parameter

<uid>

<pid>

<uid>

<username> password

Value

Up to 20 case-insensitive characters

Up to 20 case-sensitive characters. Must include at least two non- alphabetic and one special character (any printing character other than a letter, number, comma, colon, or semicolon. For case-sensitive passwords, enclose the <pid> in quotes, for example “sYmm!23”

Description

Assigned user name

Assigned password

Sample Command

ACT-USER::TECHNICIAN:TS1000::TECH01!;

This command logs in the user named Technician.

Autonomous Message

TP-SSU 03-10-24 10-18-24

A 1170 REPT EVT

“IMC:NA,LOGIN,NSA,03-10-24 10-18-24:\”USER LOGGED IN,

TECHNICIAN\””

;

Error Response

TP-SSU 03-10-24 10-18-24

M 04 DENY

<errcode>

”UNAUTHORIZED ACCESS TO THIS SYSTEM IS PROHIBITED.”

;

Logging Out

Use the following TL1 command to terminate a session and log out of the system.

Security-level users can terminate any other user. The username is not case-sensitive, but it must be spelled exactly as assigned.

CANC-USER:[<tid>]:[<uid>]:[<ctag>];

This command has a default access level of USER.

null

<uid>

<uid>

Value Description

Up to 20 case- insensitive characters

Terminates the current user’s session and logs the user off the system

Allows a user at the ADMIN or SECURITY level to terminate another user’s session

097-58001-02 Revision G – April 2008 TimeProvider User’s Guide

97

Chapter 4 Provisioning the TimeProvider

Managing the User List

Sample Command

CANC-USER::TECHNICIAN:TS1000;

This command logs out the user named Technician.

Autonomous Message

TP-SSU 03-10-24 10:25:31

A 1171 REPT EVT

“IMC,EQPT:NA,LOGOUT,NSA,03-10-24 10-25-31:\”USER LOGGED

OUT,TECHNICIAN\””

;

Adding a User

You can store up to 20 users in the TimeProvider’s user list. Each user has a name of up to 20 case-insensitive alphanumeric characters, a password of up to 20 case-sensitive characters, and one of the four defined access levels.

Use the following TL1 command to add a user to the user list. If more than 20 users are defined in the user list, the DENY response is sent. Only a Security-level user can add to the user list.

ENT-USER-SECU:[<tid>]:<uid>:[<ctag>]::<pid>,<uap>;

This command always has an access level of SECURITY.

Parameter

<uid>

<pid>

<uap>

Value

<username>

<user password>

NONE | USER |

ADMIN | SECURITY

Description

Up to 20 case-insensitive alphanumeric characters

Up to 20 case-sensitive characters. You must include at least two non-alphabetic and one special character (other than a letter, number, comma, colon, or semicolon). For case-sensitive passwords, enclose the <pid> in quotes.

The access level for the user specified by the <uid>

Sample Command

ENT-USER-SECU::TECHNICIAN:TS1000::TECH01!,USER;

This command creates a user named TECHNICIAN with a password of TECH01! at the User access level.

Autonomous Message

TP-SSU 03-10-24 10:28:24

A 1172 REPT EVT

“IMC:NA,USRADD,NSA,03-10-24 10-28-24:\”USER HAS BEEN

ADDED\””

;

98

TimeProvider User’s Guide

097-58001-02 Revision G – April 2008

Chapter 4 Provisioning the TimeProvider

Managing the User List

Changing the Current User’s Password

The ED-PID command changes the specified user’s password.

ED-PID:[<tid>]:[<uid>]:[<ctag>]::<oldpid>,<newpid>;

This command has a default access level of USER.

Keyword

<uid>

<oldpid>

<newpid>

Value Description

<username>

Must match existing value or

DENY is issued for the command

Up to 20 case-sensitive characters

Up to 20 case-insensitive alphanumeric characters

Old password for the specified user

New password for the specified user

Sample Command

ED-PID::TECHNICIAN:TS1000::TECH01!,#Tech02;

This command changes the current user’s password from TECH01! to #Tech02.

Autonomous Message

TP-SSU 03-10-24 10:30:01

A 1173 REPT EVT

“IMC:NA,PIDCHG,NSA,03-10-24 10-30-01:\”USER PASSWORD HAS

CHANGED\””

;

Displaying a User’s Access Level

Use the following TL1 command to display the access level for a specified user or for all users.

RTRV-USER-SECU::[<uid>]:[<ctag>];

This command always has an access level of SECURITY.

Parameter

<uid> null

Description

Assigned user name. Displays the access level of the specified user.

Displays the access level for all assigned user names.

097-58001-02 Revision G – April 2008 TimeProvider User’s Guide

99

Chapter 4 Provisioning the TimeProvider

Managing the User List

The response format is:

<cr><lf><lf>

^^^sid^date^time<cr><lf>

M ^ctag^COMPLD<cr><lf>

^^^”username,access”<cr><lf>

^^^”username,access”<cr><lf>

.

.

^^^”username,access”<cr><lf>

;

Response

<username>

<access>

Value

Up to 20 case- insensitive characters

NONE | USER | ADMIN | SECURITY

Sample Command

RTRV-USER-SECU::TS1000;

Normal Response

TP-SSU 03-10-24 10:31:31

M TS1000 COMPLD

“TECHNICIAN,USER”

“DEPTHEAD,SECURITY”

“DAVID,ADMIN”

;

Description

Assigned user name

Access level

Editing a User’s Access Level

Use the following TL1 command to change the access level for a specified user.

ED-USER-SECU:[<tid>]:<uid>:[<ctag>]::<keyword>=<value>;

This command always has an access level of SECURITY.

Parameter

<uid>

<keyword>

ACCLVL

<value> Description

Up to 20 case-insensitive characters Assigned user name

NONE | USER | ADMIN | SECURITY New access level for the specified user

Sample Command

ED-USER-SECU::TECHNICIAN:TS1000::ACCLVL=ADMIN;

This command changes the access level for the TECHNICIAN user to ADMIN.

100 TimeProvider User’s Guide

097-58001-02 Revision G – April 2008

Chapter 4 Provisioning the TimeProvider

Managing the User List

Autonomous Message

TP-SSU 03-10-24 10:33:04

A 1174 REPT EVT

“IMC,EQPT:NA,ACCLVL,NSA,03-10-24 10-33-04:\”USER ACCESS

LEVEL HAS CHANGED\””

;

Deleting A User

Use the following TL1 command to delete a specified user from the user list.

DLT-USER-SECU:[<tid>]:<uid>:[<ctag>];

This command has a default access level of SECURITY.

Parameter

<uid>

Value

Up to 20 case-insensitive characters

Description

Assigned user name

Sample Command

DLT-USER-SECU::TECHNICIAN:TS1000;

This command deletes the TECHNICIAN user from the user list.

Autonomous Message

TP-SSU 03-10-24 10:35:54

A 1175 REPT EVT

“IMC:EQPT:NA,USRDEL,NSA,03-10-24 10-35-54:\”USER HAS BEEN

DELETED\””

;

Retrieving Current Users

Use the RTRV-USER command to display a list of all currently connected users.

The TimeProvider supports up to 10 TCP simultaneous connections, as well as one local and one remote serial connection. If a user is logged on, the username appears in the response.

RTRV-USER:[<tid>]::[<ctag>];

This command has a default access level of USER.

Sample Command

RTRV-USER;

Normal Response

TP-SSU 03-10-24 10:37:14

M ^04^COMPLD

TECHNICIAN

;

097-58001-02 Revision G – April 2008

TimeProvider User’s Guide 101

Chapter 4 Provisioning the TimeProvider

Using SynCraft

Using SynCraft

SynCraft is Symmetricom’s craft user interface. It is delivered with the TimeProvider, and it provides a convenient GUI (graphical user interface) for managing the

TimeProvider and other Symmetricom products.

You install SynCraft using the procedures in Appendix B, CRAFT Software

Reference

.

Starting SynCraft

To start the SynCraft application, double click it’s icon, or select Start, Programs,

Symmetricom, SynCraft. The SynCraft window appears, as shown in Figure 4-1.

Figure 4-1.

The SynCraft Main Window

102 TimeProvider User’s Guide

097-58001-02 Revision G – April 2008

Chapter 4 Provisioning the TimeProvider

Using SynCraft

Creating a Connection

To create a connection to the TimeProvider, select Connection, New Connection.

The Create New Connection window appears, as shown in Figure 4-2.

Figure 4-2.

The Create New Connection Window

Fill in each field as appropriate for your installation, then click Save.

Name – the name of the connection as used by SynCraft

Type – select TimeProvider from the drop-down list

SiD – enter the Source ID for the unit

Username – enter a user name in the TimeProvider’s userid list

Password – enter the password for the user. If this is the first log-in attempt, the user level is automatically defined to be at the Security level.

Type – select TCP/IP for use with an Ethernet connection

IP address – enter the unit’s IP address

Port – enter 5000 for use with an Ethernet connection

097-58001-02 Revision G – April 2008

TimeProvider User’s Guide 103

Chapter 4 Provisioning the TimeProvider

Using SynCraft

Opening a Connection

To open a connection to the TimeProvider, right-click the name of the connection in the network element list in the left column of the SynCraft window. Select Open

Connection from the drop-down list that appears; the Logical View appears in the main SynCraft window, as shown in

Figure 4-3 .

For more information on using SynCraft, refer to the on-line help provided by selecting Help, TimeProvider Help on the main SynCraft menu.

Figure 4-3.

Logical View of the TimeProvider

Closing a Connection

To close the connection to the TimeProvider, right-click the name of the connection in the network element list and select Close Connection from the drop-down list, or select Connection, Close Connection on the main SynCraft menu.

104 TimeProvider User’s Guide

097-58001-02 Revision G – April 2008

Chapter 4 Provisioning the TimeProvider

Provisioning the IOC

Provisioning the IOC

This section describes how to provision the IOC.

Setting the System Mode

The SET-SYS-MODE command allows you to provision the operating mode of the

TimeProvider to one of the following:

SSU – Synchronization Supply Unit: provides filtering compliant with G.812 and

GR-1244

SUB – Subtending mode: provides composite clock input tracking compliant with

GR-378

PRR – Primary Reference Receiver mode: provides ITU-T G.811 and Telcordia

GR-2830 requirements for Primary Reference Receivers/Clocks

In the SSU mode, you can select the system reference from signals on the GPS,

PRS, INP1, or INP2 connectors.

In the SUB mode, the PRS input is set to Monitor only; you can select the system reference from signals on the INP1 or INP2 connectors. You can provision these inputs to Composite Clock signal types only when the TimeProvider is in SUB mode.

In the PRR mode, the antenna provides GPS signals as the primary reference.

When enabled and qualified, the PRS, INP1, and INP2 signals are used as part of the BesTime algorithm only to enhance the stability of the output signals. If the GPS input is lost when in PRR mode, the TimeProvider enters the Holdover mode even if qualified signals are present on the other inputs.

Setting the System Mode

Use the SET-SYS-MODE command to provision the TimeProvider’s operating

mode. See Operating Modes , on page 23, for more information on how the

operating mode affects the TimeProvider’s inputs and outputs.

SET-SYS-MODE:[<tid>]::[<ctag>]::<keyword>=<value>;

This command has a default access level of ADMIN.

<keyword>

SYSMODE

<value>

SSU

Description

Set the TimeProvider to SSU operating mode

PRS – Priority 1 and Enabled

INP1 – Priority 2 and Enabled

INP2 – Priority 3 and Enabled

GPS – Disabled and can be enabled

097-58001-02 Revision G – April 2008

Default value

SSU

TimeProvider User’s Guide 105

Chapter 4 Provisioning the TimeProvider

Provisioning the IOC

<keyword>

SYSMODE

(cont’d)

<value>

SUB

PRR

Description Default value

Set the TimeProvider to Subtending operating mode

PRS – Monitor only and Disabled, cannot be

Enabled

INP1 – Priority 1 and Enabled

INP2 – Priority 2 and Enabled

GPS – Monitor only and Disabled, cannot be

Enabled

Set the TimeProvider to Primary Reference

Receiver mode

PRS – Enabled as Backup Reference, can be set to Monitor or Disabled

INP1 – Enabled as Backup Reference, can be set to Monitor or Disabled

INP2 – Enabled as Backup Reference, can be set to Monitor or Disabled

GPS – Enabled and Priority 1

SSU

Sample Command

SET-SYS-MODE:::TS1000::SYSMODE=SUB;

Sets the system mode to Subtending (SUB). The inputs are set as described in the table above. Record the mode in

Table 4-4

.

Autonomous Message

TP-SSU 03-10-24 10:40:10

A 1176 REPT EVT

“SYS,EQPT:NA,SYSMODE,NSA,03-10-24 10-40-10:\"SYSTEM MODE

OF OPERATION HAS CHANGED,SUB\””

;

Retrieving the Current System Mode

Use the RTRV-SYS-MODE command to retrieve the current system mode: SSU,

SUB, or PRR.

RTRV-SYS-MODE:[<tid>]::[<ctag>];

This command has a default access level of USER.

Sample Command

RTRV-SYS-MODE:::TS1000;

Normal Response

TP-SSU 03-10-24 10:37:54

M TS1000 COMPLD

SSU

;

106 TimeProvider User’s Guide

097-58001-02 Revision G – April 2008

Chapter 4 Provisioning the TimeProvider

Provisioning the IOC

Setting the IOC Parameters

Use the ED-EQPT command to provision each IOC. This command allows you to select which IOC is Active and which is Standby; to switch the Active and Standby

IOCs; to place a IOC “In Service” or “Out of Service”; and to define the oscillator type to Type I or ST3E for a quartz-based IOC or to Type II or ST2 for a Rubidium IOC.

ED-EQPT:[<tid>]:<aid>:[<ctag>]::<keyword>=<value>;

Note: Type I and ST3E cannot be defined to a Rubidium IOC, and

Type II and ST2 cannot be defined to a quartz-based IOC.

This command has a default access level of ADMIN.

<aid>

IOCm m = 1 | 2

IOCm m = 1 | 2

(cont’d)

<keyword>

IOCMODE

IOCACTV

IOCSTATE

CLKTYPE

<value> Description Default value

ACTIVE |

STANDBY n/a

INSRV

OOSRV

ST2/TYPEII |

ST3E/TYPEI

Sets the mode of the specified

IOC. For redundant systems, changing the state of one IOC forces the other IOC to the alternate state

Sets the Standby IOC to Active

Places an “Out of Service” IOC in the “In Service” mode (restarts)

Places an “In Service” IOC in the

“Out of Service” mode. An Out of

Service IOC cannot generate outputs or monitor inputs and does not generate alarms

Defines the Local Oscillator type.

Selects the type of clock used to generate SSMs in Holdover mode

ACTIVE n/a

INSERV

TYPEI

Sample Command

ED-EQPT::IOC1:TS1000::IOCSTATE=INSERV;

This command places IOC 1 in the “In Service” mode. Use this command when you have taken an IOC out of service and are now ready to put it back in service.

Autonomous Message

TP-SSU 03-10-24 10:42:40

A 1177 REPT EVT

"IOC1,EQPT:NA,IOCSTATE,NSA,03-10-24 10-42-40:\"IOC STATE

HAS CHANGED,INSRV\"

;

097-58001-02 Revision G – April 2008

TimeProvider User’s Guide 107

Chapter 4 Provisioning the TimeProvider

Provisioning the Input Reference

Provisioning the Input Reference

You need to know the following information about the input reference signal before you can provision the Input Reference signals:

Input selection mode

Interface type

Frame type/frequency

Quality level

Priority level

SSMs and bit position

CRC

Setting the Input State

Use the ED-EQPT command to provision the inputs to the TimeProvider. You can enable, disable, or place an input in Monitor mode (where the input is monitored, but cannot be selected as the system reference).

ED-EQPT:[<tid>]:<aid>:[<ctag>]::<keyword>=<value>;

This command has a default access level of ADMIN.

<aid>

PRS

INPp (p = 1 | 2)

GPS

<keyword>

INSTATE

<value> Description Default value

ENABLE Enables the specified input ENABLE

GPS = DISABLE

MONITOR Places the specified input in

Monitor Only mode

DISABLE Disables the specified input

Sample Command

ED-EQPT::INP1:TS1000::INSTATE=MONITOR;

This command places Input 1 in the Monitor mode.

Autonomous Message

TP-SSU 03-10-24 10:44:21

A 1178 REPT EVT

“INP1,T1:NA,INSTATE,NSA,03-10-24 10-44-21:\"INPUT STATE

HAS CHANGED,MONITOR\””

;

108 TimeProvider User’s Guide

097-58001-02 Revision G – April 2008

Chapter 4 Provisioning the TimeProvider

Provisioning the Input Reference

Setting the GPS Parameters

After you install the GPS antenna, you must provision the parameters using the

ED-EQPT command.

ED-EQPT:[<tid>]:<aid>:[<ctag>]::<keyword>=<value>;

This command has a default access level of ADMIN.

<aid>

GPS

GPS

(cont’d)

<keyword>

MODE

POS

Note: The position can only be set when Mode is MANUAL

ELEVMASK

<value> Description

AUTO

MANUAL The position (latitude, longitude, and elevation) is set manually using the

POS keyword

LAT

The antenna position (latitude, longitude, and elevation) is automatically computed or recomputed and set

LONG

ELEV

5 to 45 dd-mm-ss.ssN or dd-mm-ss.ssS

dd-mm-ss.ssE or dd-mm-ss.ssW

hhhh.hh height in m

The elevation mask, below which the

TimeProvider will not track or acquire a satellite

Default value

AUTO n/a

10

Sample Command

ED-EQPT::GPS:TS1000::MODE=AUTO;

This command sets the GPS location mode to Automatic. The location of the GPS antenna is determined from multiple satellite fixes.

Autonomous Message

TP-SSU 03-10-24 10:45:15

A 1179 REPT EVT

“GPS,EQPT:NA,FRMTYPE,NSA,03-10-24 10-45-15:\"GPS MODE HAS

CHANGED,AUTO\””

;

To manually set the location of the receiver, you must enter the latitude, the longitude, and the altitude (in m) in the same command, using commas to separate the parameters.

Sample Command

ED-EQPT::GPS:TS1000::POS=30-28-34.0N,97-50-16.0W,333.0;

097-58001-02 Revision G – April 2008

TimeProvider User’s Guide 109

Chapter 4 Provisioning the TimeProvider

Provisioning the Input Reference

Autonomous Message

TP-SSU 03-10-24 10:45:15

A 1179 REPT EVT

“GPS,EQPT:NA,FRMTYPE,NSA,03-10-24 10-45-15:\"GPS LOCATION

HAS CHANGED,MANUAL\””

;

Setting the Input Frequency

Use the ED-SYNC command to provision the input PRS frequency.

ED-SYNC:[<tid>]:<aid>:[<ctag>]::<keyword>=<value>;

This command has a default access level of ADMIN.

<aid>

PRS

<keyword>

FRMTYPE

<value> Description

1.544 M | 2M | 5M |

6.312 M | 10M

Provisions the input frequency of the PRS input

Default value

2M

Sample Command

ED-SYNC::PRS:TS1000::FRMTYPE=5M;

Autonomous Message

TP-SSU 03-10-24 10:46:01

A 1179 REPT EVT

“PRS,EQPT:NA,FRMTYPE,NSA,03-10-24 10-46-01:\"INPUT

FRAMING TYPE HAS CHANGED,5M\””

;

Setting the Input Frame Type

Use the ED-SYNC command to provision the type of framing present on the input signal.

ED-SYNC:[<tid>]:<aid>:[<ctag>]::<keyword>=<value>;

If you provision the TimeProvider to the Subtending mode (see Setting the System

Mode , on page 105), then the input frame type is automatically set to Composite

Clock type signals. You can set the FRMTYPE to CC, JCC, or JCC4 when the

TimeProvider is in the Subtending mode.

When using E1 signals in the SSU mode, you can enter either CAS or CCS in the

FRMTYPE keyword. The TimeProvider accepts both CCS and CAS inputs without a fault (if the input is fault-free).

This command has a default access level of ADMIN.

110 TimeProvider User’s Guide

097-58001-02 Revision G – April 2008

Chapter 4 Provisioning the TimeProvider

Provisioning the Input Reference

<aid>

INPp p = 1 | 2

<keyword>

FRMTYPE

<value> Description

2M (2.048 MHz) | CAS |

CCS | D4 | ESF |

1.544M | 6.312M | CC |

JCC | JCC4

Provisions the frame signal type used by the input.

Default value

2M (E1)

ESF (T1)

Sample Command

ED-SYNC::INP1:TS1000::FRMTYPE=ESF;

Autonomous Message

TP-SSU 03-10-24 10:50:05

A 1181 REPT EVT

“INP1,T1:NA,FRMTYPE,NSA,03-10-24 10-50-05:\"INPUT FRAMING

TYPE HAS CHANGED,ESF\””

;

Controlling Automatic Reference Switching

The TimeProvider can determine which input reference signal has the highest quality. When the active reference signal falls below a preset quality level, the

TimeProvider can automatically switch to the next highest input reference signal. To use this feature, you must enable Automatic switching.

You can also use the performance monitoring features to automatically switch the input reference signal when user-defined performance thresholds are crossed. See

Setting MTIE and FFOFF Thresholds , on page 116 for more information on setting

and using performance monitoring commands.

Automatic Return to a Higher Priority Reference

When the REFMODE parameter is provisioned to AUTO, the system reference switches when the input signal is disqualified. When the input signal is re-qualified, the TimeProvider can either keep the current reference or switch back to the re-qualified signal. The first case, keeping the current reference, is also known as

“non-revertive” mode; the second case, switching back to the re-qualified input, is known as revertive mode.

The QLEVEL (see

Setting the Input Quality Level , on page 112) and the PRIORITY

(see

Setting the Input Priority Level , on page 113) parameters work together with

SSMs to determine the switching strategy for the inputs when the unit is in the SSU mode. If the active/primary input becomes unavailable, the switching strategy determines which input to use: the TimeProvider uses the input with the next highest QLEVEL. If all inputs have the same QLEVEL, then the TimeProvider uses the input with the highest PRIORITY.

To provision the TimeProvider as non-revertive, you must provision the user-assigned Priority Level on all inputs to the same value (1, 2, 3, or 4). To provision the TimeProvider as revertive, you provision any one of the inputs to a higher or lower Priority Level, with 1 being the highest priority.

097-58001-02 Revision G – April 2008

TimeProvider User’s Guide 111

Chapter 4 Provisioning the TimeProvider

Provisioning the Input Reference

If the original primary input becomes available again, the REFMODE, QLEVEL and

PRIORITY parameters determine whether the TimeProvider switches back to that input. If the QLEVEL and/or PRIORITY parameter of the original input is higher than the current input, the TimeProvider reverts back to the original input. If the QLEVEL parameter is the same for all inputs, then the TimeProvider does not revert back to the original input.

Enabling Automatic Switching

Use the ED-SYNC command to set the reference selection to Automatic or Forced.

When set to Automatic, then the QLEVEL and PRIORITY parameters determine the switching strategy to be revertive or non-revertive. When set to Forced, then the

TimeProvider uses the input selected with the INPREF keyword (see

Manually

Selecting the Reference , on page 114).

ED-SYNC:[<tid>]:<aid>:[<ctag>]::<keyword>=<value>;

This command has a default access level of ADMIN.

SYS

<aid> <keyword>

REFMODE

<value>

AUTO | FORCED

Description

Sets the reference selection mode

Default value

AUTO

Sample Command

ED-SYNC::SYS:TS1000::REFMODE=AUTO;

Autonomous Message

TP-SSU 03-10-24 10-52-25

A 1182 REPT EVT

“SYS,EQPT:NA,REFMODE,NSA,03-10-24 10-52-25:\”SYSTEM

REFERENCE MODE HAS CHANGED,AUTO\””

;

Setting the Input Quality Level

Use the ED-SYNC command to set the quality level (QLEVEL) of the specified input. You set the QLEVEL when using inputs that do not have an associated SSM, or when you want to set an alarm threshold for inputs that have SSMs. The

QLEVEL determines the TimeProvider’s output SSM.

If you provision QLEVEL below the quality level of the local oscillator in the IOC, then the TimeProvider disqualifies the input with the INPQL alarm. An INPQL alarm also occurs if the incoming SSM indicates that the input signal is below the quality level of the local oscillator or if the incoming SSM is below the provisioned level.

Normally, you provision the QLEVEL for each input to be either unique or all the same. If you set all QLEVEL for inputs to unique values, then you have set up a revertive switching strategy. If you set all inputs to the same value, then you have set up a non-revertive switching strategy.

112 TimeProvider User’s Guide

097-58001-02 Revision G – April 2008

Chapter 4 Provisioning the TimeProvider

Provisioning the Input Reference

ED-SYNC:[<tid>]:<aid>:[<ctag>]::<keyword>=<value>;

This command has a default access level of ADMIN.

<aid>

PRS

INPp (p = 1 | 2)

GPS

<keyword>

QLEVEL

<value>

1 = PRC

2 = UNK/STU

3 = TYPE II/ST2

4 = TYPE I

5 = TYPE V/TNC

6 = TYPE III/ST3E

7 = TYPE IV/ST3

8 = G.813OPT3/SMC

9 = DUS

Description

Sets the Quality

Level for the specified input

2

Default value

Sample Commands

ED-SYNC::PRS:::QLEVEL=1;

ED-SYNC::INP1:::QLEVEL=1;

ED-SYNC::INP2:::QLEVEL=1;

This series of commands sets the QLEVEL for all inputs to the same level; if you also provision the PRIORITY level to the same value, then you have set up a non-revertive switching strategy.

Autonomous Message

TP-SSU 03-10-24 10:54:44

A 1183 REPT EVT

“PRS,EQPT:NA,QLEVEL,NSA,003-10-24 10-54-44:\"USER

ASSIGNED QUALITY LEVEL HAS CHANGED,1\””

;

Setting the Input Priority Level

The PRIORITY level works together with the QLEVEL parameter (described in

Setting the Input Quality Level , on page 112) to determine the switching strategy.

The PRIORITY level is the second factor the TimeProvider uses to determine which input to use when the original primary input becomes unavailable.

Use the ED-SYNC command to set the PRIORITY level of the selected reference.

ED-SYNC:[<tid>]:<aid>:[<ctag>]::<keyword>=<value>;

This command has a default access level of ADMIN.

<aid>

PRS

INPp (p = 1 | 2)

GPS

<keyword>

PRIORITY

<value>

2 | 3 | 4

097-58001-02 Revision G – April 2008

Description Default value

Sets the priority for the selected input

GPS = 1

PRS = 2

INP1 = 3

INP4 = 4

TimeProvider User’s Guide 113

Chapter 4 Provisioning the TimeProvider

Provisioning the Input Reference

Sample Command

ED-SYNC::PRS:TS1000::PRIORITY=2;

ED-SYNC::INP1:TS1000::PRIORITY=2;

ED-SYNC::INP2:TS1000::PRIORITY=2;

These commands set the PRIORITY for each input to the same value; if you also provision the QLEVEL to the same value, then you set up a non-revertive switching strategy.

Autonomous Message

TP-SSU 03-10-24 10:56:00

A 1184 REPT EVT

“PRS,EQPT:NA,PRIORITY,NSA,03-10-24 10-56-00:\"PRIORITY

HAS CHANGED,2\””

;

Manually Selecting the Reference

Use the ED-SYNC command to manually select the reference. To select the reference, you must first set the REFMODE keyword to FORCED, as described in

Controlling Automatic Reference Switching , on page 111.

ED-SYNC:[<tid>]:<aid>:[<ctag>]::<keyword>=<value>;

This command has a default access level of ADMIN.

SYS

<aid> <keyword>

INPREF

<value>

GPS | PRS | INP1 |

INP2

Description

Sets the specified input to be the system reference

Default value

PRS

Sample Command

ED-SYNC::SYS:TS1000::INPREF=PRS;

This command forces the signal on the PRS input to be the reference signal. The

REFMODE keyword must be set to FORCED for this command to take effect.

Autonomous Message

TP-SSU 03-10-24 10:58:30

A 1185 REPT EVT

“SYS,EQPT:NA,INPREF,NSA,03-10-24 10-58-30:\”SYSTEM

REFERENCE INPUT HAS CHANGED, PRS\””

;

114 TimeProvider User’s Guide

097-58001-02 Revision G – April 2008

Chapter 4 Provisioning the TimeProvider

Provisioning the Input Reference

Provisioning the SSM

Before you can read Synchronization Status Messages (SSMs) on certain input signals, you need to provision the TimeProvider to read the incoming SSM and identify the bit position of the SSM. SSMs are on the following types of input signals:

E1, CAS4, CCS4

T1, ESF

Reading SSMs

To enable the use of SSMs, you must first provision the TimeProvider to read SSMs on the input. Use the ED-SYNC command to enable the specified input to read SSMs.

ED-SYNC:[<tid>]:<aid>:[<ctag>]::<keyword>=<value>;

This command has a default access level of ADMIN.

<aid>

INPp p = 1 | 2

<keyword>

SSMENA

<value>

ENABLE |

DISABLE

Description Default value

Provisions the T1 ESF or

E1 (CAS/CCS) input to read the received SSM

ENABLE

Sample Command

ED-SYNC::INP1:TS1000::SSMENA=ENABLE;

Autonomous Message

TP-SSU 03-10-24 11:02:28

A 1186 REPT EVT

“INP1,T1:NA,SSMENA,NSA,03-10-24 11-02-28:\"INPUT READING

OF SSM HAS CHANGED,ENABLE\””

;

Defining the SSM Bit Position

After you enable an E1 (CAS/CAS) input to read SSMs, you must then define the bit containing the SSM.

ED-SYNC:[<tid>]:<aid>:[<ctag>]::<keyword>=<value>;

This command has a default access level of ADMIN.

<aid>

INPp p = 1 | 2

<keyword>

SSMBIT

<value>

4 | 5 | 6 | 7 | 8

Description

Provisions the E1 (CAS/

CCS) SSM bit position.

8

Default value

Sample Command

ED-SYNC::INP1:TS1000::SSMBIT=4;

097-58001-02 Revision G – April 2008

TimeProvider User’s Guide 115

Chapter 4 Provisioning the TimeProvider

Provisioning the Input Reference

This command sets the SSM bit to position 4 in the E1 input string on Input 1.

Autonomous Message

TP-SSU 03-10-24 11:05:18

A 1187 REPT EVT

“INP1,T1:NA,SSMBIT,NSA,03-10-24 11-05-18:\"E1 SSM BIT HAS

CHANGED,4\””

;

Enabling CRC4

Use the ED-SYNC command to enable or disable the use of CRC4 on E1 inputs.

ED-SYNC:[<tid>]:<aid>:[<ctag>]::<keyword>=<value>;

This command has a default access level of ADMIN.

<aid>

INPp p = 1 | 2

<keyword>

CRCENA

<value>

ENABLE |

DISABLE

Description

Provisions the use of

CRC4 on E1 inputs

Default value

DISABLE

Sample Command

ED-SYNC::INP1:TS1000::CRCENA=ENABLE;

Normal Response

TP-SSU 03-10-24 11:06:57

A 1188 REPT EVT

“INP1,T1:NA,CRCENA,NSA,03-10-24 11-06-57:\"INPUT CRC HAS

CHANGED,ENABLE\””

;

Using Performance Monitoring

You can set thresholds for alarms and for qualifying inputs using MTIE and FFOFF data. For more information on performance monitoring, see

Performance

Monitoring , on page 24.

Setting MTIE and FFOFF Thresholds

Use the SET-TH command to set the alarm thresholds for each input and each

MTIE window.

SET-TH:[<tid>]:<aid>:[<ctag>]::<keyword>=<value>;

This command has a default access level of ADMIN.

116 TimeProvider User’s Guide

097-58001-02 Revision G – April 2008

Chapter 4 Provisioning the TimeProvider

Provisioning the Input Reference

<aid>

GPS, PRS,

INP1, INP2

<keyword>

MASK

GPS

(cont’d)

MTIE-1

MTIE-5

MTIE-10

MTIE-50

MTIE-100

MTIE-500

FFOFF-60

<value> Description

DEFAULT

GPS-R

PRS

DS1

OCN

PRC

TYPEI

TYPEII

1 to 5 000 000

1 to 5 000 000

Set the MTIE-x and FFOFF-60 thresholds to

predefined settings. Table 4-2

values for each setting.

describes the

1 to 5 000 000

1 to 5 000 000

1 to 5 000 000

1 to 5 000 000

1-second MTIE observation threshold in ns

5-second MTIE observation threshold in ns

10-second MTIE observation threshold in ns

50-second MTIE observation threshold in ns

100-second MTIE observation threshold in ns

500-second MTIE observation threshold in ns

100 to 10 000 000 Set FFOFF threshold for 60-second calculation period, in ps/s

Table 4-2. Default Mask Parameters

Default

GPS-R

PRS

DS1

OCN

PRC

TYPE I

TYPE II

MTIE-1

600

25

750

302

10 000

150

10

302

MTIE-5

50 000

150

10

312

1000

25

750

312

MTIE-10 MTIE-50 MTIE-100 MTIE-500 FFOFF-60

100 000

150

12

325

1000

25

1000

325

500 000

150

25

325

1000

25

2000

425

1 000 000 5 000 000 10 000 000

150 155 50 000

39

550

1000

39

2000

1000

155

1002

1002

155

2000

1000

1000

12 000

370 000

1000

2900

1000

Sample Command

SET-TH::GPS:TS1000::MASK=GPS-R;

This command sets the GPS input performance monitoring threshold to a mask value of GPS-R.

097-58001-02 Revision G – April 2008

TimeProvider User’s Guide 117

Chapter 4 Provisioning the TimeProvider

Provisioning the Outputs

Autonomous Message

TP-SSU 03-10-24 11:09:12

A 1189 REPT EVT

“GPS,EQPT:THRCHG,THRCHG,03-04-05 15-17-57,,,,:\”PM

THRESHOLD HAS CHANGED,MASK,GPS-R \””

;

Setting Alarm Levels for Performance Monitoring Faults

Once you set a threshold for performance monitoring faults, you can set the alarm level to indicate that a fault has occurred. Use the SET-ATTR command to set the alarm level.

SET-ATTR:[<tid>]:<aid>:[<ctag>]::<keyword>=<value>;

This command has a default access level of ADMIN.

<aid>

GPS, PRS,

INP1, INP2

<keyword>

MTIE

<value>

NR | NA | MN | MJ | CR

FFOFF NR | NA | MN | MJ | CR

Description

The alarm level when the specified input has exceeded at least one of the MTIE thresholds

The alarm level when the specified input has exceeded the FFOFF threshold

Sample Command

SET-ATTR::GPS:TS1000::MTIE=MJ;

This command sets the GPS input to report a Major alarm when the MTIE performance threshold is exceeded.

Autonomous Message

TP-SSU 03-05-15 09:59:09

A 1189 REPT EVT

“GPS,EQPT:ALMCHG,ALMCHG,03-04-05 15-17-57,,,,:\”ALARM

PARAMETER HAS CHANGED,GPS,MJ\””

;

Provisioning the Outputs

This section describes the commands you use to provision the outputs of the

TimeProvider. You provision outputs in groups of 8 (or 16 if the Expansion Panel is used) channels: each group corresponds to the location (A through D) of the Output module in the main shelf or Expansion Panel.

118 TimeProvider User’s Guide

097-58001-02 Revision G – April 2008

Chapter 4 Provisioning the TimeProvider

Provisioning the Outputs

Enabling and Disabling the Outputs

Use the ED-EQPT command to enable or disable the output signal. This command affects the specified group of eight output channels, or sixteen output channels if the

Expansion panel is also used; individual channels cannot be enabled or disabled.

ED-EQPT:[<tid>]:<aid>:[<ctag>]::<keyword>=<value>;

This command has a default access level of ADMIN.

<aid> <keyword>

OUTg g = A | B | C | D

OUTSTATE

<value>

ENABLE

DISABLE

Description

Enable the specified output group

Disable the specified output group

Default value

ENABLE

Sample Command

ED-EQPT::OUTA:TS1000::OUTSTATE=DISABLE;

This command disables output group A and turns off all 8 channels, or 16 channels if the Expansion Panel is also used.

Autonomous Message

TP-SSU 03-10-24 11-09-12

A 1189 REPT EVT

“OUTA,EQPT:NA,OUTSTATE,NSA,03-10-24 11-09-12:\"OUTPUT

GROUP STATE HAS CHANGED,DISABLE\””

;

Provisioning the Output Framing Type

Use the ED-SYNC command to provision the output framing type.

CAS and CCS are available for E1 output framing. D4 and ESF are available for T1 output framing.

ED-SYNC:[<tid>]:<aid>:[<ctag>]::<keyword>=<value>;

This command has a default access level of ADMIN.

<aid> <keyword>

OUTg g = A | B | C | D

FRMTYPE

<value> Description Default value

8K | 1.544M | 2M |

6.312M | CAS | CCS |

D4 | ESF | CC | JCC |

JCC4 | ISOLATED_1 |

Provisions the output framing

2M

097-58001-02 Revision G – April 2008

TimeProvider User’s Guide 119

Chapter 4 Provisioning the TimeProvider

Provisioning Retimer Parameters

Sample Command

ED-SYNC::OUTA:TS1000::FRMTYPE=CAS;

This command provisions output group A to an E1, CAS framing format.

Autonomous Message

TP-SSU 03-10-24 11:11:18

A 1190 REPT EVT

“OUTA,EQPT:NA,FRMTYPE,NSA,03-10-24 11-11-18:\"OUTPUT

FRAMING TYPE HAS CHANGED,CAS\””

;

Provisioning Retimer Parameters

You use several TL1 commands to provision the E1 and T1 Retimers available for the TimeProvider. The ED-EQPT command with the RTMSTATE keyword allows you to enable and disable Retimer modules and individual ports; the SLIPCLR keyword allows you to clear a Slip alarm. The ED-SYNC command with the

RTMLBO keyword allows you to set the line build-out length; the FREEFLT and

HOLDFLT keywords allow you to enable or disable the cut-through mode when the clock enters Free-run or Holdover mode.

Enabling and Disabling the Retimers

Use the ED-EQPT command to enable or disable the specified Retimer group.

Individual channels cannot be enabled or disabled.

ED-EQPT:[<tid>]:<aid>:[<ctag>]::<keyword>=<value>;

This command has a default access level of ADMIN.

<aid> <keyword>

RTMg g = A | B | C | D

RTMSTATE

<value>

ENABLE

DISABLE

Description

Enable the specified

Retimer group

Disable the specified

Retimer group

Default value

ENABLE

Sample Command

ED-EQPT::RTMA:TS1000::RTMSTATE=DISABLE;

This command disables the Retimer in group A and turns off both ports.

120 TimeProvider User’s Guide

097-58001-02 Revision G – April 2008

Chapter 4 Provisioning the TimeProvider

Provisioning Retimer Parameters

Autonomous Message

TP-SSU 03-10-24 11-09-12

A 1189 REPT EVT

“OUTA,EQPT:NA,OUTSTATE,NSA,03-10-24 11-09-12:\"OUTPUT

GROUP STATE HAS CHANGED,DISABLE\””

;

Provisioning the LBO

Use the ED-SYNC command to set the line build-out (LBO) for each port (1 or 2) on the Retimer module.

ED-SYNC:[<tid>]:<aid>:[<ctag>]::<keyword>=<value>;

This command has a default access level of ADMIN.

<aid> <keyword>

RTMg[-p] g = A | B | C | D p= 1 | 2

Note: The RTM-

LBO parameter is valid only for T1 signals; for the

E1 Retimer, the

IPNV (Invalid

Parameter)

DENY code is returned.

RTMLBO

1

2

3

0

<value>

4

Description

Sets the line build-out length to 0 to 133 ft

(0 to 40 m)

Sets the line build-out length to 133 to 266 ft

(40 to 81 m)

Sets the line build-out length to 266 to 399 ft

(80 to 121 m)

Sets the line build-out length to 399 to 533 ft

(121 to 162 m)

Sets the line build-out length to 533 to 650 ft

(162 to 198 m)

0

Default value

Sample Command

ED-EQPT::RTMA-1:TS1000::RTMLBO=2;

This command sets the line build-out length for port 1 in Retimer group A to 266 to

399 ft (80 to 121 m).

Autonomous Message

TP-SSU 03-10-24 11-09-12

A 1189 REPT EVT

“RTMA,EQPT:NA,OUTSTATE,NSA,03-10-24 11-09-12:\"LBO HAS

CHANGED,2\””

;

097-58001-02 Revision G – April 2008

TimeProvider User’s Guide 121

Chapter 4 Provisioning the TimeProvider

Provisioning NTP Parameters

Provisioning Cut-thru Mode

Use the ED-SYNC command to set the cut-thru mode for each port (1 or 2) on the

Retimer module. You can enable cut-thru mode when the local oscillator (LO) enters either the free-run or holdover mode.

ED-SYNC:[<tid>]:<aid>:[<ctag>]::<keyword>=<value>;

This command has a default access level of ADMIN.

<aid>

RTMg[-p] g = A | B | C | D p= 1 | 2

<keyword>

FREEFLT

<value>

CUTTHRU

RETIME

HOLDFLT CUTTHRU

RETIME

Description

Cut-thru mode is engaged when the LO enters free-run mode.

Cut-thru mode is not engaged when the LO enters free-run mode.

Cut-thru mode is engaged when the LO enters holdover mode.

Cut-thru mode is not engaged when the LO enters holdover mode.

Default value

RETIME

RETIME

Sample Command

ED-EQPT::RTMA-1:TS1000::FREEFLT=CUTTHRU;

This command sets the Retimer to enter cut-thru mode when the local oscillator enters free-run mode.

Autonomous Message

TP-SSU 03-10-24 11-09-12

A 1189 REPT EVT

“RTMA,EQPT:NA,OUTSTATE,NSA,03-10-24 11-09-12:\"CUTTHRU

STATE HAS CHANGED,CUTTHRU\””

;

Provisioning NTP Parameters

This section describes how to enable and provision the Network Time Protocol

(NTP) feature in the TimeProvider. There are TL1 commands that allow you to:

Activate the NTP feature

Edit the NTP parameters

122 TimeProvider User’s Guide

097-58001-02 Revision G – April 2008

Chapter 4 Provisioning the TimeProvider

Provisioning NTP Parameters

Additional NTP commands are described in the TimeProvider TL1 Reference Guide.

Activating NTP

You use the ACT-FEATURE command to enable the NTP feature on the

TimeProvider. You should contact your Symmetricom Sales representative and order part number 920-58000-01 to obtain the key to activate the NTP feature.

ACT-FEATURE:[<tid>]:<fid>:[<ctag>]::<key>;

This command has a default access level of ADMIN.

Parameter

<fid>

<key>

<value>

NTP

Up to 20 case-sensitive characters; must be within quotes to be case-sensitive.

Description

The feature to be enabled.

Key to enable the feature

Sample Command

ACT-FEATURE::NTP:TS1000::”ABcdEFgh123456”;

This command enables the NTP feature within the TimeProvider, and uses an activation code provided by Symmetricom.

Normal Response

TP-SSU 03-05-15 09-59-09

M 1166 COMPLD

“IMC Serial#=ABC123”

“NTP activated”

;

Autonomous Message

TP-SSU 03-05-15 09-59-09

A 1166 REPT EVT EQPT

“IMC,EQPT:FEATURE,TC,03-05-15 09-59-09,,,,:\”System

Feature has been enabled\””

;

Editing NTP Peer Server Parameters

You use the ED-EQPT command to edit the NTP peer server parameters after the

NTP function is activated. When you set the <func> value to ADD or DELETE, you must include the <keyid>, <minpoll>, <maxpoll> and <preferred> values.

ED-EQPT:[<tid>]:NTP:[<ctag>]::SERVER,<func>,<serverIP>,

[<keyid>,<minpoll>,<maxpoll>,<preferred>];

097-58001-02 Revision G – April 2008

TimeProvider User’s Guide 123

Chapter 4 Provisioning the TimeProvider

Provisioning NTP Parameters

This command has a default access level of ADMIN.

<aid>

NTP

<keyword>

FUNC

SERVERIP

<value> Description

Add | Delete |

Modify

0.0.0.0

IP address to be added, deleted, or modified

NTP Server IP address

Default value

NA

KEYID

MAXPOLL

1 to 65534

16 | 32 | 64 |

128 | 256 |

512 | 1024

MINPOLL 16 | 32 | 64 |

128 | 256 |

512 | 1024

PREFERRED YES | NO

Authentication ID

Maximum amount of time in seconds between server time requests

Minimum amount of time in seconds between server time requests

NTP Preferred server

1.0.0.1 to

254.255.255.254

0

1024

16

NO

Sample Command

ED-EQPT::NTP:TP1000::SERVER,ADD,192.168.10.1,1,64,1024,NO;

This command adds the server mask of 192.168.10.1, sets the Authentication ID to

1, the max poll to 64, the min poll to 1024, and the preferred to No.

Normal Response

TP-SSU 03-05-15 10-04-32

A 1166 REPT EVT

“NTP,EQPT:SERVER,TC,03-05-15 10-04-32,,,,:\NTP SERVER

CONFIGURATION HAS CHANGED,192.168.10.1,0,16,1024,NO”

;

Enabling NTP Authentication

You use the ED-EQPT command to enable or disable MD5 authentication for NTP.

When you enable authentication, the TimeProvider as the NTP server includes the authentication value in an encrypted portion of the time transmission (you use the

KEYGEN keyword to set the authentication key). An NTP client that has the same authentication key value can then authenticate the identity of the NTP server.

Authentication is optional.

ED-EQPT:[<tid>]:NTP:[<ctag>]::AUTHEN=<value>;

This command has a default access level of ADMIN.

124 TimeProvider User’s Guide

097-58001-02 Revision G – April 2008

Chapter 4 Provisioning the TimeProvider

Provisioning NTP Parameters

<aid>

NTP

<keyword>

AUTHEN

<value>

ENABLE

DISABLE

Description

Enables NTP Authentication

Disables NTP Authentication

Default value

DISABLE

Sample Command

ED-EQPT::NTP:TP1000::AUTHEN=ENABLE;

This command enables authentication in NTP transmissions from the TimeProvider.

Normal Response

TP-SSU 03-05-15 10-04-32

A 1166 REPT EVT

“NTP,EQPT:SERVER,TC,03-05-15 10-04-32,,,,:\NTP

AUTHENTICATION,ENABLED”

;

Setting the NTP Authentication Key

When you enable NTP MD5 authentication, you must create an authentication key and authentication ID. These values must be the same for the server and each client in order to perform authentication. The ED-EQPT command allows you to add, delete, or modify the authentication key and key ID.

ED-EQPT:[<tid>]:NTP:[<ctag>]::KEYGEN,<func>,<keyID>[,<key>];

This command has a default access level of ADMIN.

<aid>

NTP

<parameter>

FUNC

KEYID

KEY

<value>

ADD | DELETE |

MODIFY

1 to 65534

32-character

ASCII variable

Description

The function to be performed on the key.

Authentication ID

Authentication key

Default value

N/A

1 null

Sample Command

ED-EQPT::NTP:TP1000::KEYGEN,ADD,998,ABC123;

This command generates the key in NTP timestamps sent by the TimeProvider.

Normal Response

TP-SSU 03-05-15 10-04-32

A 1166 REPT EVT

“NTP,EQPT:SERVER,TC,03-05-15 10-04-32,,,,:\NTP

AUTHENTICATION HAS CHANGED”

;

097-58001-02 Revision G – April 2008

TimeProvider User’s Guide 125

Chapter 4 Provisioning the TimeProvider

Provisioning Alarms

Provisioning Alarms

SYS

<aid>

This section describes how you provision and manage alarms in the TimeProvider.

There are TL1 commands that allow you to:

Provision individual alarm levels

Provision system-wide alarm levels

Display current alarm settings

Display current alarms

Display alarm status

Alarms are displayed on the IMC or IMC/TPIU LEDs; they also appear on the relay contact closures on the Input module.

Provisioning the Alarm Levels

Use the SET-ATTR command to set the alarms associated with the IMC and IOC.

You can use this command to reset all alarm levels to the factory default values, and to allow the TimeProvider to escalate alarms.

Table 4-3 lists the alarms, a brief

description of each alarm, and it’s default parameters.

SET-ATTR:[<tid>]:<aid>:[<ctag>]::<keyword>[=<value>];

This command has a default access level of ADMIN.

<keyword>

ELEVTIME

FACTORY

<value> Description

ENABLE | DISABLE (default) Allow alarms to escalate from

Minor to Major and from

Major to Critical

Set the alarm levels to factory default values

<aid>

SYS

IMC

IOC

PRS

INPp (p = 1 | 2)

<keyword>

Alarm ID

<value> Description

NR = Not Reported

NA = A non-alarm event

MN = Minor alarm

MJ = Major alarm

CR = Critical alarm

CLEAR = Clears an active alarm; if the condition persists, then the alarm is reissued

See the definitions for the

Alarm ID in the following table

126 TimeProvider User’s Guide

097-58001-02 Revision G – April 2008

Chapter 4 Provisioning the TimeProvider

Provisioning Alarms

Table 4-3. Alarm Conditions and Defaults

Alarm ID

Description of Alarm

Condition

Possible

Alarm

Levels

Error

Delay

Default

Error

Delay

Editable?

PWRA

PWRB

EXPFAIL

EXTALM

IOC1COMM

IOC2COMM

Loss of A power

Loss of B power

Connection to the

Expansion Panel is lost

External alarm generated by external equipment

Comm alarm with IOC

1

Comm alarm with IOC

2

<aid> = SYS

MN | MJ |

CR

MN | MJ |

CR

NR | NA |

MN | MJ |

CR

NR | NA |

MN | MJ |

CR

IMMED

IMMED

IMMED

IMMED

<aid> = IMC

NR | NA |

MN | MJ |

CR

NR | NA |

MN | MJ |

CR

IMMED

IMMED

<aid> = IOC

IOC1COMM Comm alarm from IMC module to IOC1 module

IOC2COMM Comm alarm from IMC module to IOC2 module

IOC1TO2

COMM

IOC2TO1

COMM

IOCFAIL

Comm alarm from

IOC1 to IOC2

Comm alarm from

IOC2 to IOC1

Summary alarm of IOC failures; for example, calibration was unsuccessful

NR | NA |

MN | MJ |

CR

NR | NA |

MN | MJ |

CR

NR | NA |

MN | MJ |

CR

NR | NA |

MN | MJ |

CR

MN | MJ |

CR

IMMED

IMMED

IMMED

IMMED

IMMED

No

No

No

No

No

No

No

No

No

No

No

MJ

MJ

MJ

MN

MN

MN

MN

MN

MN

MN

MJ

Default Level

SSU

Mode

SUB

Mode

MJ

MJ

MJ

MN

MN

MN

MN

MN

MN

MN

MJ

097-58001-02 Revision G – April 2008

TimeProvider User’s Guide 127

Chapter 4 Provisioning the TimeProvider

Provisioning Alarms

Table 4-3. Alarm Conditions and Defaults (Continued)

Alarm ID

Description of Alarm

Condition

Possible

Alarm

Levels

Error

Delay

Default

Error

Delay

Editable?

No

Default Level

SSU

Mode

MN

SUB

Mode

MN CLKWARM Local oscillator on the specified IOC is in

Warm-up mode

CLKFREE Local oscillator on specified IOC is in

Free-run mode

CLKBRDG Local oscillator on specified IOC is in

Bridging mode

CLKHOLD Local oscillator on specified IOC is in

Holdover mode

MN | MJ

MN | MJ |

CR

MN | MJ |

CR

MN | MJ |

CR

IMMED

IMMED

IMMED

IMMED

<aid> = PRS

INPDISQ

INPLOS

INPFRQ

Specified input has been disqualified or qualified as a possible system reference.

Specified input has

Loss Of Signal.

1

Specified input has calculated received frequency that exceeds the pull-in range of the

LO.This alarm condition disqualifies the input as a possible reference.

2

INPPHASE Specified input port’s phase measurement exceeds usable value.

EXDSC Input has had excessive discontinuities, indicated by more than 3 signal faults (OOF, BPV, CRC, or AIS) within a 5-minute window. The alarm clears when the

5-minute window contains less than 3 signal faults.

MN | MJ |

CR

FLT

DELAY

MN | MJ |

CR

NR | NA |

MN | MJ |

CR

NR | NA |

MN | MJ |

CR

NR | NA |

MN | MJ |

CR

IMMED

IMMED

IMMED

IMMED

No

No

No

Yes

No

No

No

No

MJ

MJ

MJ

MN

MN

MN

MN

MN

MJ

MJ

MJ

MN

MN

NR

MN

MN

128 TimeProvider User’s Guide

097-58001-02 Revision G – April 2008

Chapter 4 Provisioning the TimeProvider

Provisioning Alarms

Table 4-3. Alarm Conditions and Defaults (Continued)

Alarm ID

Description of Alarm

Condition

Possible

Alarm

Levels

Error

Delay

Default

Error

Delay

Editable?

<aid> = INP1 or INP2

INPDISQ

INPAIS

INPLOS

INPOOF

INPFRQ

Specified input has been disqualified or qualified as a possible system reference.

The specified input is receiving an Alarm

Indication Signal.

1

The specified input has

Loss of Signal.

1

The specified input is receiving an Out of

Frame signal.

1

Specified input port’s calculated received frequency exceeds the pull-in range of the

LO.This alarm condition disqualifies the input as a possible reference.

2

INPPHASE Specified input port’s phase measurement exceeds usable value.

INPQL The received SSM is of lesser quality than the provisioned QLEVEL for a specified input. This alarm occurs when you provision the input’s

QLEVEL below the quality level of the LO.

EXDSC Input has had excessive discontinuities, indicated by more than 3 signal faults (OOF, BPV, CRC, or AIS) within a 5-minute window. The alarm clears when the 5- minute window contains less than 3 signal faults.

MN | MJ |

CR

MN | MJ |

CR

MN | MJ |

CR

MN | MJ |

CR

NR | NA |

MN | MJ |

CR

NR | NA |

MN | MJ |

CR

NR | NA |

MN | MJ |

CR

NR | NA |

MN | MJ |

CR

FLT

DELAY

IMMED

IMMED

IMMED

IMMED

IMMED

IMMED

IMMED

097-58001-02 Revision G – April 2008

Yes

No

No

No

No

No

No

No

MN

MN

MN

MN

MN

MN

MN

MN

Default Level

SSU

Mode

SUB

Mode

MN

MN

MN

MN

NR

MN

MN

MN

TimeProvider User’s Guide 129

Chapter 4 Provisioning the TimeProvider

Provisioning Alarms

Note:

1

2

When the fault is detected, the input is immediately removed from the possible reference list. The fault must be continuously present for the period specified by FLTDELAY before the alarm is set. After the alarm is set, it clears once the input signal is fault-free for the period specified by CLRDELAY.

Once INPFREQ is set, the alarm clears when the input frequency is within the defined pull-in range

Sample Command

SET-ATTR::SYS:TS1000::ELEVTIME=ENABLE;

This command allows alarms to automatically escalate to the next higher alarm level after the time period specified in the FLTDELAY keyword has elapsed (see

Provisioning System-Level Alarms , on page 130, for more details).

Sample Command

SET-ATTR::SYS:TS1000::EXPFAIL=NA;

This command disables the Expansion Fail alarm that occurs if you are not using an

Expansion Panel with the TimeProvider.

Provisioning System-Level Alarms

You use the ED-SYNC command to provision system-level alarms. The CLRDELAY and FLTDELAY parameters are system-wide; the parameters cannot be set for individual alarms.

ED-SYNC:[<tid>]:<aid>:[<ctag>]::<keyword>=<value>;

This command has a default access level of ADMIN.

SYS

<aid> <keyword>

CLRDELAY

FLTDELAY

FREEFLT

HOLDFLT

<value> Description Default value

0 to 1000 s

1 to 15 s

ON | SQUELCH

| AIS

ON | SQUELCH

| AIS

Sets the time delay to declare a valid input after an alarm condition clears

Sets the time delay before a fault is declared due to

LOS, AIS, or OOF alarms on the input

Determines the action when the LO enters the

Free-Run mode

Determines the action when the LO enters the

Holdover mode

10 s

5 s

SQUELCH

ON

130 TimeProvider User’s Guide

097-58001-02 Revision G – April 2008

Chapter 4 Provisioning the TimeProvider

Provisioning Alarms

<aid>

SYS

(cont’d)

<keyword>

GPSCLRDEL

GPSFLTDEL

<value>

0 to 1000 s

1 to 1000 s

Description

Sets the time delay to declare GPS is valid after an alarm condition clears

Sets the time delay before a

GPS fault is declared

5

1

Default value

Sample Command

ED-SYNC::SYS:TS1000::CLRDELAY=5;

This command declares a faulted input to be valid five seconds after the alarm condition has cleared.

Autonomous Message

TP-SSU 03-10-24 11:18:00

A 1192 REPT EVT

“SYS,EQPT:NA,CLRDELAY,NSA,03-10-24 11-18-00:\"INPUT CLEAR

DELAY HAS CHANGED\””

;

Retrieving Current Alarm Settings

You can display the current settings for any alarm using the RTRV-ATTR command.

RTRV-ATTR:[<tid>]:<aid>:[<ctag>][::<keyword>];

This command always has an access level of USER.

<aid>

SYS

SYS

IMC

IOC

PRS

INPp (p = 1 | 2)

ALL (or null)

<keyword>

ELEVTIME

Alarm ID

ALL (or null)

Description

ENABLE | DISABLE

The Alarm ID is described in Provisioning the Alarm Levels , on page 126

Returns all of the alarm attributes

097-58001-02 Revision G – April 2008

TimeProvider User’s Guide 131

Chapter 4 Provisioning the TimeProvider

Provisioning Alarms

Response Format

<cr><lf><lf> sid date time<cr><lf>

M ctag COMPLD<cr><lf>

“<aid>:event id,alarm level”<cr><lf>

“<aid>:event id,alarm level”<cr><lf>

.

.

“<aid>:event id,alarm level”<cr><lf>

;

Field

<aid> event id alarm level

Description

The aid specified in the command

The identifier of the alarm whose level is displayed

The value indicates the alarm level that is generated by an alarm event:

NR = Not Reported

NA = A non-alarm event

MN = Minor alarm

MJ = Major alarm

CR = Critical alarm

Sample Command

RTRV-ATTR::SYS:TS1000;

This command causes the TimeProvider to return the alarm levels associated with all system-level alarms.

Normal Response

TP-SSU 03-10-24 11:21:20

M TS1000 COMPLD

"SYS:IOC1EQPT,NA"

"SYS:IOC2EQPT,NA"

"SYS:PWRA,MJ"

"SYS:PWRB,MJ"

"SYS:EXTALM1,MJ"

"SYS:EXTALM2,CR"

"SYS:EXPFAIL,MJ"

;

Retrieving Current Alarms

You can display the current active alarms using the RTRV-ALM command.

RTRV-ALM:[<tid>]:<aid>:[<ctag>];

132 TimeProvider User’s Guide

097-58001-02 Revision G – April 2008

Chapter 4 Provisioning the TimeProvider

Provisioning Alarms

This command has a default access level of USER.

<aid>

ALL (or null)

SYS

IMC

IOCm (m = 1 | 2)

PRS

INPp (p = 1 | 2)

OUTg (g = A | B | C | D)

Description

Access identifiers

Normal Response Format

<cr><lf><lf>

^^^sid^date^time<cr><lf>

M^<ctag>^COMPLD

^^^”<aid>,aidtype:ntfcncde,condtype,srveff,ocrdat,ocrtim

<:condscr>”<cr><lf>*

; where * indicates zero or more of the preceding element

<aid> aidtype

Value

ntfcncde condtype srveff ocrdat ocrtim condscr

Description

Access identifier

Access identifier type

EQPT – alarm associated with operation of the system

T1 – alarm associated with inputs or outputs

Notification code:

MN – Minor alarm

MJ – Major alarm

CR – Critical alarm

Condition type – keyword associated with the command

Service affecting indicator

Occurrence date of the alarm

Occurrence time of the alarm

Optional condition description – text string enclosed in quotation marks

Sample Command

RTRV-ALM:::TS1000;

This command causes the TimeProvider to return all current alarms.

097-58001-02 Revision G – April 2008

TimeProvider User’s Guide 133

Chapter 4 Provisioning the TimeProvider

Provisioning Alarms

Normal Response

TP-SSU 03-10-24 11:22:11

M TS1000 COMPLD

"SYS,EQPT:MJ,PWRA,NSA,03-10-24 11-22-11:\"POWER A FAILED\""

"SYS,EQPT:MJ,EXPFAIL,SA,03-10-24 11-22-11:\"EXPANSION CONNECTIVITY FAILED\""

"IOC2,EQPT:MJ,CLKFREE,SA,03-10-24 11-25-15:\"CLOCK ENTERED FREE-RUN MODE\""

"INP1,T1:MN,INPLOS,NSA,03-10-24 11-25-16:\"LOS FAULT\""

"INP2,T1:MN,INPDISQ,NSA,03-10-24 11-25-17:\"INPUT DISQUALIFIED AS POSSIBLE

REFERENCE\""

"INP2,T1:MN,INPLOS,NSA,03-10-24 11-25-17:\"LOS FAULT\""

;

Displaying Alarm Status

The RTRV-COND command displays information about the current summary alarm status of components within the TimeProvider. The active IOC reports alarms for the

Input, Output, and Expansion Panel.

RTRV-COND:[<tid>]:<aid>:[<ctag>];

This command always has an access level of USER.

<aid>

ALL (or null)

Description

Access Identifiers

Normal Response Format

<cr><lf><lf>

^^^sid^date^time<cr><lf>

M ^ctag^COMPLD<cr><lf>

^^^”SYS:<pwra>,<pwrb>,<expstatus>,<extfault>,<ioc1eqpt>,

<ioc2eqpt>,<sysqlevel>,<lastdat>,<lasttim>”<cr><lf>

^^^”IMC:<ioc1comm>,<ioc2comm>”<cr><lf>

[^^^”IOC1:<iocstatus>,<ioccomm>,<imccomm>”<cr><lf>]

[^^^”IOC2:<iocstatus>,<ioccomm>,<imccomm>”<cr><lf>]

^^^”GPS:<gpsstatus>”<cr><lf>

^^^”PRS:<prsstatus>”<cr><lf>

^^^”INP1:<inpstatus>”<cr><lf>

^^^”INP2:<inpstatus>”<cr><lf>

^^^”OUTA:<outstatus>”<cr><lf>

^^^”OUTB:<outstatus>”<cr><lf>

^^^”OUTC:<outstatus>”<cr><lf>

^^^”OUTD:<outstatus>”<cr><lf>

;

134 TimeProvider User’s Guide

097-58001-02 Revision G – April 2008

Chapter 4 Provisioning the TimeProvider

Provisioning Alarms

SYS

IMC

<aid>

IOCm m = 1 | 2

GPS

PRS

INPp p = 1 | 2

OUTg g = 1 | 2 | 3 | 4

Description

Displays the connectivity status of the Expansion Panel and any alarms associated with the Expansion Panel

<pwra> – PWRA-OK | PWRA-FAIL

<pwrb> – PWRB-OK | PWRB-FAIL

<expstatus> – OK | ALM

<extfault> – OK | ALM

Displays all conditions related to the Information Management module

<ioc1comm> – IOC1COMM-OK | IOC1COMM-FAIL

<ioc2comm> – IOC2COMM-OK | IOC2COMM-FAIL

Displays the current setup and conditions related to the system-level function of the IOC module

<iocstatus> – OK | ALM (IOCFAIL)

<ioccomm> – IOC1TO2COMM-OK | IOC1TO2COMM-FAIL

IOC2TO1COMM-OK | IOC2TO1COMM-FAIL

<imccomm> – IMC1COMM-OK | IMC1COMM-FAIL |

IMC2COMM-OK | IMC2COMM-FAIL

Displays GPS Input state and any alarm events associated with GPS input

<gpsstatus> – OK | ALM

Displays PRS Input state and any alarm events associated with PRS input

<prsstatus> – OK | ALM

Displays Input state and any alarm events associated with Inputs 1 or 2

<inpstatus> – OK | ALM

Displays output status; this reflects the state of IOCFAIL of the active

IOC

<outstatus> – OK | ALM

Sample Command

RTRV-COND::IOC:TS1000;

Normal Response

TP-SSU 03-10-24 11:27:28

M TS1000 COMPLD

“SYS,PWRA-OK,PWRB-OK,OK,OK”

;

Clearing Alarms

Clearing the Office (Audible) Alarm

Use the following TL1 command to turn off (squelch) the audible office alarm. The office alarm reactivates when a new alarm occurs.

OPR-ACO-ALL:[<tid>]::[<ctag>];

097-58001-02 Revision G – April 2008

TimeProvider User’s Guide 135

Chapter 4 Provisioning the TimeProvider

Provisioning SNMP Parameters

This command has a default access level of USER.

Sample Command

OPR-ACO-ALL:::TS1000;

Normal Response

TP-SSU 03-10-24 11:26:47

M TS1000 COMPLD

“IMC,EQPT:NA,ACO,NSA,03-10-24 11-26-47:\"AUDIO ALARM IS

DEACTIVATED”

;

Provisioning SNMP Parameters

The Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) implemented in the

TimeProvider supports SNMP v1, v2C, and v3. You can add up to 20 SNMP users

(also known as communities or principals); these users cannot have the same name as TL1 users.

Activating SNMP

You use the ACT-FEATURE command to enable the SNMP feature on the

TimeProvider. You should contact your Symmetricom Sales representative and order part number 920-58002-01 to obtain the key to activate the SNMP feature.

ACT-FEATURE:[<tid>]:<fid>:[<ctag>]::<key>;

This command has a default access level of ADMIN.

Parameter

<fid>

<key>

<value>

SNMP

Up to 20 case-sensitive characters; must be within quotes to be case-sensitive.

Description

The feature to be enabled.

Key to enable the feature

Sample Command

ACT-FEATURE::SNMP:TS1000::”ABcdEFgh123456”;

This command enables the SNMP feature within the TimeProvider, and uses an activation code provided by Symmetricom.

Normal Response

TP-SSU 03-05-15 09-59-09

M 1166 COMPLD

“IMC Serial#=ABC123”

“SNMP activated”

;

136 TimeProvider User’s Guide

097-58001-02 Revision G – April 2008

Chapter 4 Provisioning the TimeProvider

Provisioning SNMP Parameters

Autonomous Message

TP-SSU 03-05-15 09-59-09

A 1166 REPT EVT EQPT

“IMC,EQPT:FEATURE,TC,03-05-15 09-59-09,,,,:\”System

Feature has been enabled\””

;

Adding a User

You use the Enter User Security command to add an SNMP user to the

TimeProvider:

Changing A User’s Security Parameters

You use the Edit User Security command to change the security parameters, such as authentication protocol, authentication password, and privacy password.

Displaying the Connected Users

You use the Retrieve User Security command to view the users connected to the

TimeProvider.

Deleting a User

You use the Delete User Security command to delete TL1 and SNMP users from the TimeProvider.

Setting Up SNMP Traps, Informs, and Notifications

You can set up to five users to send out a trap, and up to five managers to receive the trap. You must also set up the timeout and retrry parameters for each user/manager.

SNMP v1

To set up Traps, create an SNMP v1 community using the ENT-USER-SECU command. Add a MGRx and SENDERx using the ED-EQPT command. There is no

Inform capability in SNMP v1. The engineid parameter in the ENT-USER-SECU command is ignored; the IFTOUTx and IFRETRYx parameters are not used.

SNMP v2C

To set up Notifications, create an SNMP v2C community using the

ENT-USER-SECU command. Add a MGRx and SENDERx using the ED-EQPT command. Set the IFTOUTx and IFRETRYx parameters to 0.

To set up Informs, create an SNMP v2C community using the ENT-USER-SECU command. Add a MGRx and SENDERx using the ED-EQPT command. Set the

IFTOUTx and IFRETRYx parameters to a nonzero value.

097-58001-02 Revision G – April 2008

TimeProvider User’s Guide 137

Chapter 4 Provisioning the TimeProvider

System Commands

SNMP v3

To set up Notifications, create an SNMP v3 user with or without MD5 or SHA using the ENT-USER-SECU command. DO not add the engineid. Add a MGRx and

SENDERx using the ED-EQPT command. Set the IFTOUTx and IFRETRYx parameters to 0.

To set up Informs, create an SNMP v3 user with or without MD5 or SHA using the

ENT-USER-SECU command. Include the engineid of the manager engine. Add a

MGRx and SENDERx using the ED-EQPT command. Set the IFTOUTx and

IFRETRYx parameters to a nonzero value.

System Commands

This section describes the TL1 commands you use to perform the following routine operations with the TimeProvider:

Displaying events

Displaying the current configuration

Restarting the TimeProvider

Displaying Events

The RTRV-LOG command displays all the events in the event log in chronological order (first in - first out). The event log contains the 500 most recent alarmed and non-alarmed events. Alarms with an alarm level of NONE are not stored in the log.

RTRV-LOG:[<tid>]:[<aid>]:[<ctag>][::<keyword>=<value>];

This command has a default access level of USER.

<aid>

ALL (or null)

IMC

IOC

IOCm (m = 1 | 2)

GPS

PRS

INPp (p = 1 | 2)

OUTg (g = A | B | C | D)

<keyword>

All (or null)

EVT

ALM

Description

Displays both events and alarms stored in the log for the specified aid

Displays events stored in the log for the specified event

Displays alarms stored in the log for the specified event

Sample Command

RTRV-LOG::INP1:TS1000::ALM;

This command causes the TimeProvider to return all alarms stored in the log for

Input 1.

138 TimeProvider User’s Guide

097-58001-02 Revision G – April 2008

Chapter 4 Provisioning the TimeProvider

System Commands

Normal Response

TP-SSU 03-10-24 11:28:02

M 2 COMPLD

“INP1,T1:MJ,ALM,NSA,03-10-24 11-26-47”

;

Normal Response Format

<cr><lf><lf>

^^^sid^date^time<cr><lf>

M^<ctag>^COMPLD

^^^”<aid>,<aidtype>:ntfcncde,condtype,srveff,ocrdat,ocrtim

<:condscr>”<cr><lf>*

; where * indicates zero or more of the preceding element

Displaying the Configuration of the TimeProvider

Use the following TL1 command to display the current equipment parameters. You can display the parameters for the following components: SYS, COM, IOC, GPS,

PRS, INP, and OUT.

RTRV-EQPT:[<tid>]:<aid>:[<ctag>]::<keyword>;

This command has a default access level of USER.

Response

<aid>

<keyword>

<value>

Description

The access identifier for the equipment component (SYS, COM,

IMC, IOC, GPS, PRS, INP, or OUT)

The specific equipment parameter you requested See the

TimeProvider TL1 Reference Guide for details on the available keywords.

The current setting of the requested equipment parameter.

Sample Command

RTRV-EQPT::IOC1:TS1000::IOCMODE;

This command causes the TimeProvider to return the current operating mode for IOC1.

Normal Response

TP-SSU 03-10-24 11:30:42

M TS1000 COMPLD

“IOC1:IOCMODE,ACTIVE”

;

097-58001-02 Revision G – April 2008

TimeProvider User’s Guide 139

Chapter 4 Provisioning the TimeProvider

System Commands

Normal Response Format

<cr><lf><lf>

^^^sid^date^time<cr><lf>

M ^ctag^COMPLD<cr><lf>

^^^”<aid>:<keyword>,<value>”<cr><lf>

;

Restarting the TimeProvider

Use the INIT-SYS command to reset the specified module or to clear all information stored in non-volatile memory. All users logged in to the TimeProvider are logged out and the user list is cleared.

Caution: This command causes the local oscillator in the specified IOC to enter the Warm-up mode; the outputs remain in the holdover mode until the local oscillator locks on to the input reference signal.

All SYS parameters are reset, including the entire user list. You must create a new security-level user after issuing this command with the SYS:FACTORY aid and keyword.

INIT-SYS:[<tid>]:<aid>:[<ctag>]::<keyword>;

This command has a default access level of ADMIN.

SYS

<aid>

IMC

IOCm m = 1 | 2

<keyword>

FACTORY

RESET

Description

Resets the SID, security, communication ports, and alarm settings to factory defaults (see

Appendix A,

Factory Default Values

)

Performs a soft reset on the card and clears all alarms.

Does not affect the SID, security, communication ports, and alarm settings

Sample Command

INIT-SYS::IOC1:::RESET;

Autonomous Message

TP-SSU 03-10-24 11:31:52

A 1193 REPT EVT

“IOC,EQPT:MN,RESET,NSA,03-10-24 11-30-42:\”MODULE HAS

BEEN RESET\””

;

140 TimeProvider User’s Guide

097-58001-02 Revision G – April 2008

Chapter 4 Provisioning the TimeProvider

Saving Provisioning Data

Saving Provisioning Data

Symmetricom recommends that you keep an electronic version and/or a written version of the provisioning changes you make to the TimeProvider.

Electronically Backing up Provisioning Data

Copy the contents of the IOC into the IMC memory by issuing the CPY-MEM command as follows. See the TimeProvider TL1 Reference Guide for more information on the CPY-MEM command.

CPY-MEM:::TS1000::IOC,IMC,IOC;

Copy the contents of the IMC into the IOC memory by issuing the CPY-MEM command as follows:

CPY-MEM:::TS1000::IMC,IOC,IMC;

This command may take more than two seconds to execute; if it does, then the

In-Process response is issued. This command also logs off all users connected to the TimeProvider.

If two IOCs are in the shelf, the Active IOC automatically saves its data in the

Standby IOC.

Provisioning Worksheet

Use

Table 4-4

to record the values you provisioned into the TimeProvider.

Table 4-4. Provisioning Record

Section Parameter

Setting the Source ID <sid>

Setting RS-232 Parameters

, on page 90

, on page 91

Source ID (<sid>)

Baud rate

Handshaking mode

Echo mode

Setting Ethernet Parameters , on page 93

IP Gate address

IP address

Setting the System Mode , on page 105

Subnet mask

System mode

Setting the IOC Parameters , on page 107

Oscillator type, IOC1

Oscillator type, IOC2

User-Defined Value

097-58001-02 Revision G – April 2008

TimeProvider User’s Guide 141

Chapter 4 Provisioning the TimeProvider

Saving Provisioning Data

Table 4-4. Provisioning Record (Continued)

Section Parameter

Setting the Input State , on page 108

Controlling Automatic Reference

Switching , on page 111

Setting the Input Quality Level , on page

112

Input mode, PRS

Input mode, INP1

Input mode, INP2

Input mode, GPS

Setting the GPS Parameters , on page 109

GPS Mode

GPS Position

GPS Elevmask

Setting the Input Frequency , on page 110

Frequency, PRS

Setting the Input Frame Type , on page

110

Frame type, INP1

Frame type, INP2

Reference mode

QLEVEL, PRS

QLEVEL, INP1

QLEVEL, INP2

QLEVEL, GPS

Setting the Input Priority Level , on page

113

PRIORITY, PRS

PRIORITY, INP1

PRIORITY, INP2

PRIORITY, GPS

INPREF

Manually Selecting the Reference , on page 114

Provisioning the SSM , on page 115

Enabling CRC4 , on page 116

Enabling and Disabling the Outputs page 119

, on

SSMBIT, INP1

SSMBIT, INP2

CRCENA, INP1

CRCENA, INP2

OUTSTATE, OUTA

OUTSTATE, OUTB

OUTSTATE, OUTC

OUTSTATE, OUTD

142 TimeProvider User’s Guide

User-Defined Value

097-58001-02 Revision G – April 2008

Table 4-4. Provisioning Record (Continued)

Section Parameter

Provisioning the Output Framing Type page 119

Enabling and Disabling the Retimers page 120

Provisioning the LBO , on page 121

, on

, on

FRMTYPE, OUTA

FRMTYPE, OUTB

FRMTYPE, OUTC

FRMTYPE, OUTD

RTMSTATE, RTMA

RTMSTATE, RTMB

RTMSTATE, RTMC

RTMSTATE, RTMD

RTMLBO, RTMA-1

RTMLBO, RTMA-2

RTMLBO, RTMB-1

RTMLBO, RTMB-2

RTMLBO, RTMC-1

RTMLBO, RTMC-2

RTMLBO, RTMD-1

RTMLBO, RTMD-2

Provisioning Cut-thru Mode , on page 122

FREEFLT, RTMA-1

FREEFLT, RTMA-2

FREEFLT, RTMB-1

FREEFLT, RTMB-2

FREEFLT, RTMC-1

FREEFLT, RTMC-2

FREEFLT, RTMD-1

FREEFLT, RTMD-2

Chapter 4 Provisioning the TimeProvider

Saving Provisioning Data

User-Defined Value

097-58001-02 Revision G – April 2008

TimeProvider User’s Guide 143

Chapter 4 Provisioning the TimeProvider

Saving Provisioning Data

Table 4-4. Provisioning Record (Continued)

Section

Provisioning Cut-thru Mode , on page 122

(cont’d)

Editing NTP Peer Server Parameters page 123

Setting the NTP Authentication Key page 125

, on

, on

Parameter

HOLDFLT, RTMA-1

HOLDFLT, RTMA-2

HOLDFLT, RTMB-1

HOLDFLT, RTMB-2

HOLDFLT, RTMC-1

HOLDFLT, RTMC-2

HOLDFLT, RTMD-1

HOLDFLT, RTMD-2

KEYID

MAXPOLL

MINPOLL

PREFERRED

SERVERIP

FUNC

KEYID

KEY

ELEVTIME

Provisioning the Alarm Levels , on page

126

Provisioning System-Level Alarms , on page 130

CLRDELAY

FLTDELAY

FREEFLT

HOLDFLT

GPSCLRDEL

GPSFLTDEL

User-Defined Value

144 TimeProvider User’s Guide

097-58001-02 Revision G – April 2008

Chapter 5 Testing the TimeProvider

This chapter describes a basic acceptance test for the TimeProvider product.

In This Chapter

Testing the TimeProvider

Verifying Normal Operation

Testing Alarm Conditions

Testing the Communication Ports

Testing the Outputs

Test Record

097-58001-02 Revision G – April 2008

TimeProvider User’s Guide 145

Chapter 5 Testing the TimeProvider

Testing the TimeProvider

Testing the TimeProvider

Perform the tests described in this chapter after you install (see Chapter 3, Installing the TimeProvider

) and provision (see

Chapter 4, Provisioning the TimeProvider ) the

TimeProvider. Record the results in the Test Record in

Test Record , on page 153.

These tests verify the operation of the TimeProvider and are not mandatory for operating the unit.

Test Overview

This chapter describes four tests that verify the operation of the TimeProvider:

Verify normal operation

Test alarm conditions

Test communication ports

Perform output checks

Test Equipment

To perform the tests in this chapter, you need the following equipment:

Volt-ohmmeter

Oscilloscope

Communications analyzer

Verifying Normal Operation

The LEDs on the IMC and the IOC(s) indicate the status of the TimeProvider.

Table

5-1 shows the condition of the LED indicators on the front panel of the IOC under

normal operating conditions.

Table 5-1. LED Conditions for the IOC

LED Name

Power

Fail

Alarm

Active

Green

Off

Off

Green

Off

Condition Description

Power is On

No failure

No alarm

Card is active

Card is in standby mode

146 TimeProvider User’s Guide

097-58001-02 Revision G – April 2008

Chapter 5 Testing the TimeProvider

Verifying Normal Operation

Table 5-1. LED Conditions for the IOC (Continued)

LED Name

Holdover

PRS

Input 1

Input 2

GPS

Condition

Off

Q LED Green, A LED Green

Q LED Green, A LED Off

Q LED Red, A LED Off

Q LED Green, A LED Green

Q LED Green, A LED Off

Q LED Red, A LED Off

Q LED Green, A LED Green

Q LED Green, A LED Off

Q LED Red, A LED Off

Off

Green

Amber

Red

Description

Tracking at least one input

Enabled, qualified, and active

Enabled, qualified, and not active

Enabled and not qualified

Enabled, qualified, and active

Enabled, qualified, and not active

Enabled and not qualified

Enabled, qualified, and active

Enabled, qualified, and not active

Enabled and not qualified

1 PPS signal is not present

1 PPS signal is active

Bridging mode fault

Loss of 1 PPS signal, TPIU fault, or antenna fault

Table 5-2 shows the condition of the LED indicators on the front panel of the IMC

under normal operating conditions.

Table 5-2. LED Conditions for the IMC and IMC/TPIU

LED Name

Power

Fail

Alarm

Critical

Major

Minor

ACO

Condition

Green

Off

Off

Off

Off

Off

Off

Description

Power is On

No failure

No alarm

No Critical alarms

No Major alarms

No Minor alarms

Alarm cutoff disabled

097-58001-02 Revision G – April 2008

TimeProvider User’s Guide 147

Chapter 5 Testing the TimeProvider

Testing Alarm Conditions

Testing Alarm Conditions

Testing the IOC Operating Modes

Warm-up Mode

The IOC enters and remains in the Warm-up mode for approximately 30 minutes after you apply power to the shelf, or when you install the IOC into the shelf. The following actions occur when an IOC enters the Warm-up mode:

The Power LED on the IOC flashes green

An event is generated and stored in the event log

To verify that an IOC is in warm-up mode:

1. Apply an appropriate signal to the INP1, INP2, and/or PRS inputs.

2. Visually inspect the Power LED on the appropriate IOC. The LED is flashing green in the Warm-up mode.

3. Type

RTRV-ALM::IOC1;

(or

RTRV-ALM::IOC2;

). The TimeProvider responds with a complied message indicating that the designated IOC is in alarm.

Locked Mode

The IOC enters and remains in the locked mode after it has completed the warm-up cycle. The following actions occur when an IOC enters the Locked mode:

The Power LED on the IOC is green

An event is generated and stored in the event log

To verify that an IOC is in locked mode:

1. Visually inspect the Power LED on the appropriate IOC. The LED is continually green when the IOC is tracking at least one input.

2. Type

RTRV-LOG::IOC1:::EVT;

(or

RTRV-LOG::IOC2:::EVT;

). The

TimeProvider responds with a list of events related to the specified IOC. Look for the entry with the text “Clock entered lock mode.”

148 TimeProvider User’s Guide

097-58001-02 Revision G – April 2008

Chapter 5 Testing the TimeProvider

Testing Alarm Conditions

Testing the Reference Switching

To test the ability of the TimeProvider to switch references, you perform a two-step test:

Connect appropriate reference inputs to the TimeProvider.

Create a fault on the selected reference signal and observe that the

TimeProvider changes to the appropriate secondary input.

To test the reference switching:

1. Connect a suitable reference signal to the PRS input and a second reference signal to the INP1 input. Wait for the Qualified LEDs for both inputs to turn green and for the Active LED to light on the PRS input.

2. Issue the

ED-EQPT::PRS:::INSTATE=DISABLE;

command to disable the PRS input and force the TimeProvider to switch to the INP1 reference.

3. Observe that the Active LED changes from the original input to the secondary input (PRS to INP1 or INP1 to PRS).

Testing the Non-Revertive Operating Mode

When the TimeProvider is in the non-revertive operating mode, the input reference signal does not revert to the original input after it recovers from an error condition.

The TimeProvider is in non-revertive mode when the QLEVEL parameter for INP1,

INP2, and PRS inputs is set to the same value, and the PRIORITY parameters for the same inputs are set to the same level.

To test the non-revertive operating mode, perform the following steps:

1. Define the non-revertive mode by setting the QLEVEL and PRIORITY parameters to appropriate values. See

Setting the Input Quality Level , on page

112, and

Setting the Input Priority Level , on page 113, for further information.

2. Provision and connect appropriate reference inputs to the TimeProvider.

3. Create a fault on the selected reference signal and observe that the

TimeProvider changes to the appropriate secondary input.

4. Remove the fault on the initial reference signal and observe that the

TimeProvider does not revert to that initial reference input. The event log indicates that the reference signal is no longer in fault.

097-58001-02 Revision G – April 2008

TimeProvider User’s Guide 149

Chapter 5 Testing the TimeProvider

Testing Alarm Conditions

Testing the Revertive Operating Mode

When the TimeProvider is in the revertive operating mode, the input reference signal reverts to the original input after it recovers from an error condition.

The TimeProvider is in the revertive mode when the QLEVEL parameter for INP1,

INP2, and PRS inputs are set to different values, and the PRIORITY parameters for the same inputs are also set to different values.

To test the revertive operating mode, perform the following steps:

1. Define the revertive mode by setting the QLEVEL and PRIORITY parameters to

appropriate values. See Setting the Input Quality Level

, on page 112, and Setting the Input Priority Level , on page 113, for further information.

2. Provision and connect appropriate reference inputs to the TimeProvider.

3. Create a fault on the selected reference signal and observe that the

TimeProvider changes to the appropriate secondary input.

4. Remove the fault on the initial reference signal and observe that the

TimeProvider reverts to the initial reference input. The event log and the LEDs indicate that the input is no longer in fault, and that the reference has changed.

Testing the Power Alarms

To test the ability of the TimeProvider to detect and report problems with the battery power, you perform a two-step test:

Connect power to the TimeProvider on both Batt A and Batt B terminals

Remove power from one terminal and observe that the TimeProvider issues the appropriate alarm

When power is lost from the Batt A or Batt B terminal, the factory default alarm is

Major.

1. Connect the appropriate power supply to both the Batt A and Batt B connectors.

The TimeProvider enters the Warm-up mode.

2. Remove power from either the Batt A or Batt B terminal. Observe that the Major

LED on the IMC is red. Verify that a Major alarm is included in the event log.

150 TimeProvider User’s Guide

097-58001-02 Revision G – April 2008

Chapter 5 Testing the TimeProvider

Testing the Communication Ports

Detecting Input Errors

You can provision the TimeProvider to perform a variety of functions when an input error occurs. Possible errors include:

AIS - Alarm Indication Signal

LOS - Loss of Signal

OOF - Out of Frame

Loss of Alignment

Excessive wander

Input is disqualified

GPS faults

The TimeProvider reports these and other errors on the front panel alarm LEDs, in an autonomous event message, and via devices connected to the alarm relays. You can provision each error to a specific alarm level (Minor, Major, or Critical).

Setting an Alarm Strategy

You can set up the input alarms to prevent spurious input errors from triggering an alarm. The FLTDELAY keyword parameter sets a period from 1 to 15 seconds that an input error must be present before the alarm is issued. You can provision the alarm to clear from 1 to 1000 seconds after the input error clears using the

CLRDELAY keyword parameter. Use the ED-SYNC command syntax described in

Provisioning System-Level Alarms , on page 130 to provision the FLTDELAY and

CLRDELAY keywords.

Testing the Communication Ports

The TimeProvider has three communication ports. This section describes how to test each port; if you do not plan to use a port, then you can skip the corresponding test.

Local Craft serial port

Remote serial port

Ethernet port

Testing the Local Craft Serial Port

The local Craft serial port is on the faceplate of the IMC or IMC/TPIU, and is configured as a DCE device. The default settings for the local Craft serial port are

9600 Baud, 8 bits, no parity, 1 stop bit, echo on, and handshaking disabled.

To connect a device to the local Craft port, perform the following steps:

097-58001-02 Revision G – April 2008

TimeProvider User’s Guide 151

Chapter 5 Testing the TimeProvider

Testing the Communication Ports

1. Connect a straight-through serial cable to the local Craft port. Connect the other end of the cable to a computer.

2. Start a terminal emulation program such as HyperTerminal or ProComm Plus.

Configure the program for 9600 baud, 8 data bits, No parity, and 1 stop bit.

3. Type

;

(semicolon). If the TimeProvider responds with a Deny response, you have established communications. If you do not receive the Deny response, check the connections, the cable, and the program settings.

Testing the Remote Serial Port

The Remote port is for remote dial-in connection to the unit, and is configured as a

DTE device. The default settings for the Remote serial port are 9600 Baud, 8 bits, no parity, 1 stop bit, echo on, and handshaking disabled.

To connect a device to the Remote port, perform the following steps:

1. Connect a null-modem serial cable to the Remote port. Connect the other end of the cable to a computer.

2. Start a terminal emulation program such as HyperTerminal or ProComm Plus.

Configure the program for 9600 baud, 8 data bits, No parity, and 1 stop bit.

3. Type

;

(semicolon). If the TimeProvider responds with a Deny response, you have established communications. If you do not receive the Deny response, check the connections, the cable, and the program settings.

Testing the Ethernet Port

You use a direct connection when a service technician is on-site. You must configure the Ethernet settings using a serial connection before using the Ethernet connection; the procedure is described in

Setting Ethernet Parameters , on page 93.

To connect the TimeProvider to a PC or terminal using Ethernet, perform the following steps:

1. Connect an RJ-45 Ethernet cable to the LAN connector on the shelf.

2. Connect the other end of the cable to the PC or terminal.

3. Start a terminal emulation program such as HyperTerminal or ProComm Plus.

Configure the program for a telnet session and enter the IP address with port

5000 of the TimeProvider.

4. Type

;

(semicolon). If the TimeProvider responds with a Deny response, you have established communications. If you do not receive the Deny response, check the connections, the cable, and the program settings.

152 TimeProvider User’s Guide

097-58001-02 Revision G – April 2008

Chapter 5 Testing the TimeProvider

Testing the Outputs

Testing the Outputs

The TimeProvider supports up to 32 output signals on four output groups. You can provision the output signal to the following types: 2M, CAS, CCS, D4, ESF, CC,

JCC, JCC4, 1.544 MHz, 6.312 MHz, 8 kHz, or ISOLATED_1.

To test the outputs, connect the communications analyzer to the output under test and observe that the waveforms meet or exceed the specifications for that signal type.

Test Record

Use

Table 5-3 to record the results of the tests performed on the TimeProvider.

Table 5-3. Record of Test Results

Test

Verifying Normal Operation

IOC Operating Modes

Reference Switching

Non-Revertive Mode

Revertive Mode

Power Alarms

Input Errors

Local Serial Port

Remote Serial Port

Ethernet Port

Outputs

Results (Pass/Fail) Date Initials

097-58001-02 Revision G – April 2008

TimeProvider User’s Guide 153

Chapter 5 Testing the TimeProvider

Test Record

154 TimeProvider User’s Guide

097-58001-02 Revision G – April 2008

Chapter 6 Maintaining and Troubleshooting the

TimeProvider

This chapter describes maintenance and troubleshooting procedures for the

TimeProvider.

In This Chapter

Preventive Maintenance

Safety Considerations

ESD Considerations

Diagnosing the IOC

Diagnosing the IMC

Diagnosing the External TPIU

Replacing Output Modules

Replacing the Input Module

Troubleshooting the TimeProvider

Repairing the TimeProvider

Obtaining Technical Assistance

Upgrading the Firmware

Returning the TimeProvider

Manual Updates

097-58001-02 Revision G – April 2008

TimeProvider User’s Guide 155

Chapter 6 Maintaining and Troubleshooting the TimeProvider

Preventive Maintenance

Preventive Maintenance

The TimeProvider shelf requires minimal preventive maintenance. Take care to ensure the unit is not exposed to hazards such as direct sunlight, open windows,

water, or extreme heat. See Environmental Requirements in

Pre-Installation Check , on page 54, for electromagnetic compatibility conditions that may cause damage.

Caution: To avoid electromagnetic discharge damage to the circuitry, never attempt to vacuum the TimeProvider main shelf or expansion shelf.

Caution: To avoid damage, under no circumstances should the interior chassis of the TimeProvider be allowed to come in contact with water.

Table 6-1 lists preventive maintenance measures to be performed periodically. Do

not disassemble components just for the purpose of inspection.

Table 6-1. Preventive Maintenance

Item

Chassis

Cables

Connectors

Inspection Corrective Action

Inspect for dirt or foreign material

Inspect for pinched, worn or damaged cable

Inspect for loose or damaged connector

Clean the exterior of chassis with a soft dry cloth

Replace pinched, worn or damaged cable at the first opportunity

Tighten loose connectors. If damaged, replace the connector and/or cable at the first opportunity

Interval

Periodically

Periodically

Periodically

Safety Considerations

Follow your company’s safety guidelines and policies when working on or around live equipment.

ESD Considerations

Maintenance personnel should wear ESD wrist straps when installing or working on all TimeProvider equipment and cards. Plug the user-supplied wrist strap into the

TimeProvider shelf. Place IMC and IOC cards as well as the Input and Output panels into static-free bags when not in use.

156 TimeProvider User’s Guide

097-58001-02 Revision G – April 2008

Chapter 6 Maintaining and Troubleshooting the TimeProvider

Diagnosing the IOC

Diagnosing the IOC

Reading LED Conditions

Table 6-2 shows the function of the LED indicators on the front panel of the IOC.

Table 6-2. LED Conditions for the IOC

LED Name

Power

Fail

Alarm

Active

Holdover

PRS

Input 1

Input 2

GPS

Condition

Green

Off

Flashing Green

Red

Off

Red

Off

Green

Off

Off

Amber

Red

Q LED Off A LED Off

Q LED Amber A LED Off

Q LED Green A LED Green

Q LED Green A LED Off

Q LED Red A LED Off

Q LED Off A LED Off

Q LED Amber A LED Off

Q LED Green A LED Green

Q LED Green A LED Off

Q LED Red A LED Off

Q LED Flashing GreenA LED Off

Q LED Off A LED Off

Q LED Amber A LED Off

Q LED Green A LED Green

Q LED Green A LED Off

Q LED Red A LED Off

Q LED Flashing GreenA LED Off

Off

Green

Amber

Red

097-58001-02 Revision G – April 2008

Description

Power is On

Power is Off

Warming Up

Card failure

No failure

Card alarm

No alarm

Card is active

Card is in standby mode

Tracking at least one input

Not tracking in PRR mode; Bridging Mode engaged

Tracking no inputs

Disabled

Enabled, in process of qualifying

Enabled, qualified, and active

Enabled, qualified, and not active

Enabled and not qualified

Disabled

Enabled, in process of qualifying

Enabled, qualified, and active

Enabled, qualified, and not active

Enabled and not qualified

Enabled and not qualified: Tip-Ring reversed

Disabled

Enabled, in process of qualifying

Enabled, qualified, and active

Enabled, qualified, and not active

Enabled and not qualified

Enabled and not qualified: Tip-Ring reversed

Disabled

Enabled and GPS qualified

Enabled and in Bridging mode

Enabled and GPS disqualified (except in

Bridging mode)

TimeProvider User’s Guide 157

Chapter 6 Maintaining and Troubleshooting the TimeProvider

Diagnosing the IOC

Interpreting Error Messages

Error messages appear on the console as they occur, and include the time and date of occurrence. Refer to the event codes described in

Table 6-5

and to the alarm codes described in

Table 6-7 .

Compatibility Alarm

If you receive a COMPAT alarm, then one or more of the installed hardware and/or software components is not compatible with other components. Refer to the

Software Release Notice (097-58001-22) for a list of compatible components and firmware revision levels. If necessary, update the firmware in one or more components using the procedures in

Upgrading the Firmware , on page 187.

Removing the IOC

You can remove either of two IOCs in a shelf without affecting outputs. If you need to remove the only IOC in a shelf, or remove both IOCs from a shelf, outputs are interrupted and will resume once one IOC has achieved lock on an input signal.

IOC Memory

The IOC stores its configuration and the configuration of the redundant IOC, if it is installed. This configuration information is stored in non-volatile memory, and is retained even if the IOC is removed from the shelf. The IOC also stores the configuration of the IMC. The configuration of the IMC is stored in volatile memory and is lost if the IOC is removed from the shelf.

Removing the Only IOC

To remove the only IOC in a shelf, use the following procedure. Output signals will be interrupted; they will resume once the IOC has achieved lock on an input signal.

1. Save the contents of the IOC memory in the IMC by issuing the following command:

CPY-MEM:::::IOC,IMC,IOC;

This command may take more than two seconds to execute; if it does, then the

In-Process response is issued. See the TimeProvider TL1 Reference Guide for more information on the CPY-MEM command.

2. Issue the following command to take the IOC out of service:

ED-EQPT::IOCm:::IOCSTATE=OOSRV; where m is 1 or 2, and determines which IOC you take out of service.

3. Attach a wrist grounding strap and connect it to the TimeProvider chassis.

158 TimeProvider User’s Guide

097-58001-02 Revision G – April 2008

Chapter 6 Maintaining and Troubleshooting the TimeProvider

Diagnosing the IOC

4. Loosen the captive retaining screws and pull out on them to unseat the IOC from the shelf.

Warning: To avoid possible electrostatic damage to the IOC, place it in a static-free bag or on a static-free surface.

5. Place the IOC in a static-free bag or on a static-free surface.

6. Install a new IOC using the appropriate procedure in

Replacing the IOC , on page

160.

Removing a Redundant IOC

To remove one IOC when two IOCs are in a shelf, use the following procedure.

Note: To avoid generating unnecessary alarms, be sure to take the IOC out of service before removing it.

Caution: To avoid a loss of output signals, do not take the only

IOC in a shelf out of service.

1. Issue the following command to take the IOC out of service:

ED-EQPT::IOCm:::IOCSTATE=OOSRV; where m is 1 or 2, and depends on the slot in which the IOC is installed (1 is the left slot and 2 is the right slot).

An IOC that is out of service cannot be selected to generate or monitor outputs.

An out-of-service IOC does not generate alarms.

2. Attach a wrist grounding strap and connect it to the TimeProvider chassis.

3. Loosen the captive retaining screws and pull out on them to unseat the IOC from the shelf.

Warning: To avoid possible electrostatic damage to the IOC, place it in a static-free bag or on a static-free surface.

4. Place the IOC in a static-free bag or on a static-free surface.

5. Install a new IOC using the appropriate procedure in

Replacing the IOC , on page

160.

097-58001-02 Revision G – April 2008

TimeProvider User’s Guide 159

Chapter 6 Maintaining and Troubleshooting the TimeProvider

Diagnosing the IOC

Removing Two IOCs

To remove both IOCs in a shelf, use the following procedure.

1. Save the contents of the Active IOC memory in the IMC by issuing the following command.

CPY-MEM:::::IOC,IMC,IOC;

This command may take more than two seconds to execute; if it does, then the

In-Process response is issued. See the TimeProvider TL1 Reference Guide for more information on the CPY-MEM command.

2. Issue the following TL1 command to take the Standby IOC out of service:

ED-EQPT::IOCm:::IOCSTATE=OOSRV; where m is 1 or 2, and corresponds to the location of the Standby IOC (1 is the left slot and 2 is the right slot).

Caution: Output signals are turned off when you place the second IOC out of service.

3. Attach a wrist grounding strap and connect it to the TimeProvider chassis.

4. Loosen the captive retaining screws and pull out on them to unseat the IOC from the shelf.

Warning: To avoid possible electrostatic damage to the IOC, place it in a static-free bag or on a static-free surface.

5. Place the IOC in a static-free bag or on a static-free surface.

6. Repeat Steps 2, 3, and 4 for the Active IOC.

7. Install new IOCs using the appropriate procedure in

Replacing the IOC , on page

160.

Replacing the IOC

This section contains procedures for replacing IOC in three circumstances;

Replacing the only IOC in a shelf

Replacing one of two IOCs in a shelf

Replacing both IOCs in a shelf

160 TimeProvider User’s Guide

097-58001-02 Revision G – April 2008

Chapter 6 Maintaining and Troubleshooting the TimeProvider

Diagnosing the IOC

Replacing the Only IOC

To replace the only IOC in a shelf, use the following procedure. Output signals will resume once the IOC has achieved lock on an input signal. This procedure assumes that you have stored the contents of the IOC memory in the IMC using the

CPY-MEM command.

1. Attach a wrist grounding strap and connect it to the TimeProvider chassis.

2. Install the IOC into the shelf and tighten the captive retaining screws.

3. Copy the contents of the IOC memory stored in the IMC by issuing the following command.

CPY-MEM:::::IMC,IOC,IOC;

This command may take more than two seconds to execute; if it does, then the

In-Process response is issued. See the TimeProvider TL1 Reference Guide for more information on the CPY-MEM command.

If you have not stored the contents of the IOC memory in the IMC, then provision the IOC using the procedures and commands described in

Chapter 4,

Provisioning the TimeProvider

.

4. Wait for the IOC to reboot and qualify the reference inputs.

Replacing a Redundant IOC

To replace either of two IOCs in a shelf, use the following procedure. Output signals will not be affected by this procedure. You can also use this procedure to add an

IOC to a shelf that has only one IOC.

1. Install the IOC into the shelf and tighten the captive retaining screws.

2. Wait for the IOC to reboot and qualify the reference inputs. During this time the

Active IOC updates the new IOC’s memory with current values.

Replacing Both IOCs

Use this procedure to replace both IOCs in a shelf. Output signals will resume when the Active IOC has warmed up and qualified the reference signals. This procedure assumes that you have stored the contents of the IOC memory in the IMC using the

CPY-MEM command.

1. Attach a wrist grounding strap and connect it to the TimeProvider chassis.

2. Install the IOC into the left slot of the shelf and tighten the captive retaining screws. This IOC will become the Active IOC.

3. Wait for the IOC to reboot.

097-58001-02 Revision G – April 2008

TimeProvider User’s Guide 161

Chapter 6 Maintaining and Troubleshooting the TimeProvider

Diagnosing the IMC

4. Retrieve the contents of the IOC memory stored in the IMC by issuing the following command.

CPY-MEM:::::IMC,IOC,IOC;

This command may take more than two seconds to execute; if it does, then the

In-Process response is issued. See the TimeProvider TL1 Reference Guide for more information on the CPY-MEM command.

If you have not stored the contents of the IOC memory in the IMC, then provision the IOC using the procedures and commands described in

Chapter 4,

Provisioning the TimeProvider

.

5. Issue the following TL1 command to place the IOC in service:

ED-EQPT::IOC1:::IOCSTATE=INSRV;

6. Install the IOC into the right slot of the shelf and tighten the captive retaining screws. This IOC will become the Standby IOC.

7. Wait for the IOC to reboot and qualify the reference inputs. During this time the

Active IOC updates the new IOC’s memory with current values.

8. Issue the following TL1 command to place the Standby IOC in service:

ED-EQPT::IOC2:::IOCSTATE=INSRV;

Diagnosing the IMC

Reading LED Conditions

Table 6-3

shows the function of the LED indicators on the front panel of the IMC and

IMC/TPIU.

Table 6-3. LED Conditions for the IMC and IMC/TPIU

Power

Fail

Alarm

Critical

LED Name

162 TimeProvider User’s Guide

Condition

Green

Off

Red

Off

Red

Off

Red

Off

Power is On

Power is Off

Card failure

No failure

Card alarm

No alarm

Critical system alarm

No alarm

Description

097-58001-02 Revision G – April 2008

Chapter 6 Maintaining and Troubleshooting the TimeProvider

Diagnosing the IMC

Table 6-3. LED Conditions for the IMC and IMC/TPIU (Continued)

Major

LED Name

Minor

Alarm Cutoff (ACO)

Antenna Power

(IMC/TPIU only)

Antenna Signal

(IMC/TPIU only)

Condition

Red

Off

Yellow

Off

Green

Off

Green

Red

Off

Green

Red

Off

Description

Major system alarm

No alarm

Minor system alarm

No alarm

On

Off

Internal TPIU is communicating with Antenna

Internal TPIU has lost communication with Antenna

GPS is disabled

Antenna is communicating with the internal TPIU

Master shelf is powering up

Antenna has lost communication with the internal TPIU

Interpreting Error Messages

Error messages appear on the console as they occur, and include the time and date of occurrence. Refer to the event codes described in

Table 6-5

and to the alarm codes described in

Table 6-7 .

Replacing the IMC or IMC/TPIU

You can remove the IMC or the IMC/TPIU from the shelf and replace it without affecting outputs.

1. Save the contents of the IMC memory in an IOC by issuing the following command:

CPY-MEM:::::IMC,IOC,IMC;

This command may take more than two seconds to execute; if it does, then the

In-Process response is issued. See the TimeProvider TL1 Reference Guide for more information on the CPY-MEM command.

2. Attach a wrist grounding strap and connect it to the TimeProvider chassis.

3. Remove the IMC by loosening the captive screws and pulling the IMC from the shelf using the U-shaped handles.

Warning: To avoid possible electrostatic damage to the IMC, place it in a static-free bag or on a static-free surface.

097-58001-02 Revision G – April 2008

TimeProvider User’s Guide 163

Chapter 6 Maintaining and Troubleshooting the TimeProvider

Diagnosing the External TPIU

4. Place the IMC in a static-free bag or on a static-free surface.

5. Insert another IMC into the shelf and tighten the captive screws.

Note: If the replacement IMC has a different software load than the original IMC, you cannot log in to the TimeProvider using the existing username and password. You must create a new username and password using the ENT-USER-SECU command.

6. Reload the IMC memory from the IOC by issuing the following command:

CPY-MEM:::::IOC,IMC,IMC;

Diagnosing the External TPIU

Table 6-4 shows the function of the LED indicators on the front panel of the

standalone TPIU.

Table 6-4. LED Conditions for the External TPIU

LED Name

TPIU Power

Antenna Power

Antenna Signal

Condition

Green

Off

Green

Red

Off

Green

Red

Off

Description

Interconnection cable is connected

Interconnection cable is disconnected or GPS input is disabled

TPIU is communicating with Antenna

TPIU has lost communication with Antenna

Interconnection cable is disconnected or GPS input is disabled

Antenna is communicating with the TPIU

Master shelf is powering up or antenna is powering up

Antenna has lost communication with the TPIU

Diagnosing the Retimer Module

The Retimer module is transparent to framing errors, bipolar violations, and data errors; these errors are passed through to the downstream Network Element. If an incorrect signal type is inserted into the Retimer module (for example, if an E1 signal is connected into a T1 Retimer), the module may report a large slip count.

Verify that the proper signal is inserted into the Retimer module.

164 TimeProvider User’s Guide

097-58001-02 Revision G – April 2008

Chapter 6 Maintaining and Troubleshooting the TimeProvider

Replacing Output Modules

Replacing Output Modules

The TimeProvider supports up to four Output modules on the shelf, and up to four additional Output modules on the Expansion Panel. A variety of Output modules is available to support different wiring schemes (see

Making Output Connections , on page 66, for a description of the available Output modules).

To remove an Output module:

7. Disable the outputs on the Output module by issuing the command:

ED-EQPT::OUTg:::OUTSTATE=DISABLE; where g is the output group you are disabling (A, B, C, or D)

8. Attach a wrist grounding strap and connect it to the TimeProvider chassis.

9. Remove the output connections.

10.Remove the Output module by loosening the captive screws and pulling the module off the shelf.

Warning: To avoid possible electrostatic damage to the Output module, place it in a static-free bag or on a static-free surface.

11.Place the module in a static-free bag or on a static-free surface.

To install an Output module:

1. Install the Output module on the connector on the shelf and tighten the captive screws.

2. Install the output signal connections to the Output module. After you install the connections, you can remove the protective ground strap from your wrist.

3. Enable the outputs on the Output module by issuing the command:

ED-EQPT::OUTg:::OUTSTATE=ENABLE; where g is the output group you are enabling (A, B, C, or D)

097-58001-02 Revision G – April 2008

TimeProvider User’s Guide 165

Chapter 6 Maintaining and Troubleshooting the TimeProvider

Replacing the Input Module

Replacing the Input Module

The Input module contains connectors for the input signals and the alarm output connector.

To remove the Input module:

1. Disable the inputs by issuing the following commands, as appropriate:

ED-EQPT::PRS:::INSTATE=DISABLE;

ED-EQPT::INPp:::INSTATE=DISABLE; where p is 1 to disable INP1 or 2 to disable INP2

2. Wait for the TimeProvider to enter the Holdover state before proceeding.

3. Attach a wrist grounding strap and connect it to the TimeProvider chassis.

4. Remove the input connections.

5. Remove the alarm connections.

6. Remove the Input module by loosening the captive screws and pulling the module off the shelf.

Warning: To avoid possible electrostatic damage to the Input module, place it in a static-free bag or on a static-free surface.

To install the Input module:

1. Install the Input module on the connector on the shelf and tighten the captive screws.

2. Install the input signal connections.

3. Install the alarm connections. After you install the connections, you can remove the protective ground strap from your wrist.

4. Enable the inputs by issuing the following commands as appropriate:

ED-EQPT::PRS:::INSTATE=ENABLE;

ED-EQPT::INPp:::INSTATE=ENABLE; where p is 1 to enable INP1 or 2 to enable INP2

166 TimeProvider User’s Guide

097-58001-02 Revision G – April 2008

Chapter 6 Maintaining and Troubleshooting the TimeProvider

Troubleshooting the TimeProvider

Troubleshooting the TimeProvider

Using Events to Troubleshoot

You can provision most events to generate an alarm; alarm levels include Critical

(CR), Major (MJ), Minor (MN), Event, (NA), and Not Reported (NR). Table 6-5

lists the event ID and the description of events for the IMC, IOC, and IOC Input.

Table 6-5. Event Codes

Event ID

Keyword

Description

AID

TYPE

Default Value/

Keyword

Description of Values

ACCLVL

ACO

ALMCHG

AOMERGE

BAUD

CMDCHG

The user’s system access level has changed in the database

IMC Event Codes

EQPT SECURITY

(when no users have been assigned to the system)

N/A

NONE – User has access to all commands; no Security has been assigned

USER – User can access

User-level commands

ADMIN – User can access

Admin-level commands

SECURITY – User can access all commands

N/A Audio alarm has been deactivated

The IMC alarm parameters have changed

EQPT

EQPT N/A

Enable/Disable autonomous event generation for the current session

The IMC serial port baud rate has changed

The command access level has changed

EQPT

EQPT

EQPT

ENABLE

9600

ACCLVL-USER

Alarm keywords and values

are listed in Table 6-7 . When

the user changes a value, the

ALMCHG event is generated and contains the keyword and value

ENABLE – Autonomous messages are displayed in the current session

DISABLE – Autonomous messages are not displayed in the current session

2400 | 9600 | 19200 | 28800 |

38400 | 57600

NONE | USER | ADMIN |

SECURITY

097-58001-02 Revision G – April 2008

TimeProvider User’s Guide 167

Chapter 6 Maintaining and Troubleshooting the TimeProvider

Troubleshooting the TimeProvider

Table 6-5. Event Codes (Continued)

Event ID

ECHO

FLOW

Keyword

Description

The current sessions’ echo setting has changed

AID

TYPE

EQPT

The IMC serial port flow control has changed

EQPT

Default Value/

Keyword

DISABLE

NONE n/a

Description of Values

ENABLE – User’s keystrokes are echoed

DISABLE – User’s keystrokes are not echoed

NONE – No flow control

SW – Software flow control

(XON/XOFF)

HW – Hardware flow control

(CTS/RTS)

SWHW – Both hardware and software flow control used n/a FWFAIL

FWOK

INACTTIME The communication inactivity timeout has been set. If no activity within the specified time, the session closes

INITLOG

IPADDR

The event log has been initialized

The IMC Ethernet address has been changed

IPGATE

Firmware upgrade of

IMC or IOC was not successful

Firmware upgrade of

IMC or IOC was successful

IPSUB

ISDIFF

The IMC Ethernet gateway address has been changed

The IMC Ethernet subnet mask has been changed

Indicates that the CRC of two Istate images stored on separate modules are different

EQPT

EQPT

EQPT

EQPT

EQPT

EQPT

EQPT

EQPT n/a

0 n/a

127.0.0.1

127.0.0.1

255.255.255.0

n/a n/a

0 – Disable timeout

100 to 10000 seconds n/a

1.0.0.1 to 254.255.255.254

1.0.0.1 to 254.255.255.254

n/a n/a

168 TimeProvider User’s Guide

097-58001-02 Revision G – April 2008

Chapter 6 Maintaining and Troubleshooting the TimeProvider

Troubleshooting the TimeProvider

Table 6-5. Event Codes (Continued)

Event ID

Keyword

Description

AID

TYPE

ISEQ Indicates that the CRC of two Istate images stored on separate modules are equal

LOGECHO The system echoes the login or logout events

EQPT

EQPT

LOGIN

Default Value/

Keyword

n/a n/a

Description of Values

ENABLE n/a

ENABLE – The login/logout events are echoed

DISABLE – The login/logout events are not echoed n/a

LOGOUT

PIDCHG

RESET

SIDCHG

UIDCHG

USRADD

USRDEL

A user has logged in to the system

A user has logged out of the system

A user’s password has changed in the database

The IMC has been reset by user command

The source ID has changed in the database

A user’s name has changed in the database

A user has been added to the database

EQPT

EQPT

EQPT

EQPT

EQPT

EQPT

EQPT n/a pid n/a n/a uid uid pid uap uid n/a

User Password – up to 20 alphanumeric characters n/a

20-character name used to identify the network element

User Identification – up to 20 characters uid – assigned user name pid – assigned user password uap – assigned user access level uid – username

XFERFAIL

A user has been deleted from the database

Transfer of the IMC

Istate to the IOC, transfer of the IOC

Istate to the IMC, or transfer of the IOC

Istate to the redundant

IOC was not successful

EQPT

EQPT n/a n/a

097-58001-02 Revision G – April 2008

TimeProvider User’s Guide 169

Chapter 6 Maintaining and Troubleshooting the TimeProvider

Troubleshooting the TimeProvider

Table 6-5. Event Codes (Continued)

Event ID

XFEROK

Keyword

Description

AID

TYPE

Transfer of the IMC

Istate to the IOC, transfer of the IOC

Istate to the IMC, or transfer of the IOC

Istate to the redundant

IOC was successful

EQPT

Default Value/

n/a

Keyword

IOC Event Codes

TYPEI CLKTYPE The specified IOC clock has been set to the specified value.

This value is used to define the IOCs pull-in range and SSM generation in Holdover mode

INPREF The specified input has been set as the system reference

IOCMODE The specified IOC has become Active

IOCSTATE The specified IOC has been inserted into the system. The IOC is automatically placed

In-Service

The specified IOC has been taken out of service. The IOC can no longer generate alarms, be provisioned, or accept queries

Communication between the IMC and

IOC has failed

The specified IOC has been removed from the system

EQPT

EQPT

EQPT

EQPT

PRS

ACTIVE

INSRV n/a

Description of Values

ST3E | TYPE I

ST2 | TYPE II

PRS | INP1 | INP2

ACTIVE | STANDBY

INSRV – In service

OOSRV – Out of service

COMMFLT –

Communications fault

UNEQUIPPED

170 TimeProvider User’s Guide

097-58001-02 Revision G – April 2008

Chapter 6 Maintaining and Troubleshooting the TimeProvider

Troubleshooting the TimeProvider

Table 6-5. Event Codes (Continued)

Event ID

Keyword

Description

AID

TYPE

RESET The indicated IOC is being restarted after a user-requested reset.

All alarms are cleared, if it was Active, it becomes Standby

SYSMODE The system mode of operation has been changed

EQPT

EQPT

Default Value/

Keyword

n/a n/a

Description of Values

SSU SSU – Sync Supply Unit mode

SUB – Subtending mode

PRR – Primary Reference

Receiver mode

IOC Clock Events

n/a CLKFSTLK The local oscillator in the specified IOC is in

Fast-Lock mode

CLKLOCK The local oscillator in the specified IOC is in

Lock mode

SCAVAIL The specified IOC is in

SmartClock mode

EQPT

EQPT

EQPT n/a

OFF n/a n/a

OFF – SmartClock is not available

ON – SmartClock is available

CRCENA Indicates whether the

E1 (CAS/CCS) inputs are using CRC4 checking. If the E1 input is provisioned to read SSMs, then this value is Enabled

IOC Input Events

T1 DISABLE ENABLE | DISABLE

097-58001-02 Revision G – April 2008

TimeProvider User’s Guide 171

Chapter 6 Maintaining and Troubleshooting the TimeProvider

Troubleshooting the TimeProvider

Table 6-5. Event Codes (Continued)

Event ID

FRMTYPE

OUTSTATE

Keyword

Description

Indicates the type of input framing or the input frequency. Sets the input framing type

The specified output state has changed

AID

TYPE

T1

T1

RQLEVEL The received quality level on the specified input has changed

T1

SYS Events

5 s CLRDELAY Time, in seconds, before a faulted signal indicates it is valid as a system reference

ELEVTIME Indicates that Alarm elevation time (1440 min.) is enabled or disabled

FACTORY Indicates that the unit has been reset to

Factory default. All modules installed in the system are reset

FLTDELAY Time, in seconds, before faulted signal indicates it is not valid as a system reference

EQPT

EQPT

EQPT

EQPT

DISABLE n/a

10 s

Default Value/

Keyword

Output = 2M

DISABLE n/a

Description of Values

1.544M – 1.544 MHz

2M – 2048 kHz

6.312M – 6.312 MHz

CAS – CAS Input

CCS – CCS Input

ESF – Extended SuperFrame input

CC – Composite Clock input

ISOLATED_1 – Generates an isolated one test pattern for

T1 outputs

JCC – Japan Composite Clock

JCC4 – Japan Composite

Clock with 400 Hz

ENABLE – The output generates the defined signal type

DISABLE – Disables the output and clears all active alarms associated with the input

Displays the prior quality level followed by the new quality level

0 to 1000 s

ENABLE | DISABLE n/a

1 to 15 s

172 TimeProvider User’s Guide

097-58001-02 Revision G – April 2008

Chapter 6 Maintaining and Troubleshooting the TimeProvider

Troubleshooting the TimeProvider

Table 6-5. Event Codes (Continued)

Event ID

FREEFLT

Keyword

Description

AID

TYPE

Indicates if the Output

Fault is issued when the local oscillator enters Free-Run mode.

EQPT

Default Value/

Keyword

SQUELCH

5 s

Description of Values

ON – In fault mode, generate outputs based on system SSM

AIS – In fault mode, generate

AIS outputs

SQUELCH – In fault mode, outputs are turned off

0 to 1000 s GPSCLR

DEL

GPSFLTDEL

HOLDFLT

The time, in seconds, after a cleared GPS fault can be used.

Time, in seconds, before a GPS fault indicated it is not valid

Indicates if the Output

Fault is issued when the local oscillator enters Holdover mode

EQPT

EQPT

EQPT

1 second

ON

1 to 1000 s

INPREF

LOCTIM

TIMCHG

Indicates if the system automatically selects another reference input. Operator has enabled the selected reference input

(REFMODE must be set to FORCED)

The local system time offset has changed

T1

EQPT

REFMODE Indicates if the system reference can be selected automatically or by the user

EQPT

The system time has been changed

EQPT

PRS

(00)-00

AUTO hh-mm-ss

ON – In fault mode, generate outputs based on system

SSM

AIS – In fault mode, generate

AIS outputs

SQUELCH – In fault mode, outputs are turned off

PRS – PRS input is selected as reference

INP1 – INP1 is selected as reference

INP2 – INP2 is selected as reference

(hh) – hours offset

±

12 mm – minutes offset 00 to 59

AUTO – System uses

QLEVEL and Priority to select the system reference

FORCED – User selects the system reference. If the selected reference fails, this value reverts to AUTO mode hh – hours (24-hour clock) mm – minutes ss – seconds

097-58001-02 Revision G – April 2008

TimeProvider User’s Guide 173

Chapter 6 Maintaining and Troubleshooting the TimeProvider

Troubleshooting the TimeProvider

Table 6-6 describes the alarm codes and their set and clear conditions.

Table 6-6. Set and Clear Conditions for Alarms

Alarm ID Set Alarm Conditional Description Clear Alarm Conditional Description

COMPAT

EXPFAIL

PWRA

PWRB

EXTALM1

EXTALM2

IOC1EQPT

IOC2EQPT

SYS Codes

System components are incompatible System components are compatible

Expansion connectivity failed Expansion connectivity restored

Power A Failed

Power B Failed

Power A Restored

Power B Restored

External Alarm 1 set

External Alarm 2 set

IOC1 removed from the shelf

IOC2 removed from the shelf

External Alarm 1 cleared

External Alarm 2 cleared

IOC1 reinstalled

IOC2 reinstalled

IOC1COMM

IOC2COMM

IMCFAIL

IMC Codes

IMC to IOC1 communication failed

IMC to IOC2 communication failed

Summary alarm of BIST faults

IOC1 Codes

IMC to IOC1 communication established

IMC to IOC2 communication established

IOC1COMM IOC1 to IMC communication failed

IOC1TO2COMM IOC1 to IOC2 communication failed

IOCFAIL

BTBCKUP

IOC hardware failure

IOC1 to IMC communication established

IOC1 to IOC2 communication established

IOC hardware restored

BesTime backup reference disqualified BesTime backup sources qualified

CLKBRDG

CLKFREE

CLKHOLD

CLKWARM

SYNTHEOR

Clock is in Bridging mode

Clock entered Free-run mode

Clock entered Holdover mode

Clock entered Warm-up mode

Output generator exceeded pull-in range

Clock exited Bridging mode

Clock exited Free-run mode

Clock exited Holdover mode

Clock exited Warm-up mode

Output generator within pull-in range

IOC2 Codes

IOC2COMM IOC2 to IMC communication failed

IOC2TO1COMM IOC2 to IOC1 communication failed

IOCFAIL IOC hardware failure

IOC2 to IMC communication established

IOC2 to IOC1 communication established

IOC hardware restored

174 TimeProvider User’s Guide

097-58001-02 Revision G – April 2008

ANTCOMM

GPSPOS

GPSPWR

GPSSYS

GPSTRK

INPDISQ

INPLOS

INPFRQ

INPPHASE

EXDSC

FFOFF

MTIE

TPIUSIG

Chapter 6 Maintaining and Troubleshooting the TimeProvider

Troubleshooting the TimeProvider

Table 6-6. Set and Clear Conditions for Alarms (Continued)

Alarm ID

BTBCKUP

CLKBRDG

CLKFREE

CLKHOLD

CLKWARM

SYNTHEOR

INPDISQ

INPAIS

INPLOS

INPOOF

INPFRQ

INPPHASE

INPQL

Set Alarm Conditional Description

BesTime backup reference disqualified BesTime backup sources qualified

Clock entered Bridging mode Clock exited Bridging mode

Clock entered Free-run mode

Clock entered Holdover mode

Clock exited Free-run mode

Clock exited Holdover mode

Clock entered Warm-up mode

Output generator exceeded pull-in range

Clock exited Warm-up mode

Output generator within pull-in range

GPS Codes

Clear Alarm Conditional Description

GPS antenna communication fault

GPS antenna position unknown

GPS power fault

GPS system fault

GPS is not tracking satellites

GPS input is disqualified

LOS fault

Frequency threshold exceeded

Phase error exceeded threshold

Excessive discontinuity fault

FFOFF exceeded threshold

MTIE exceeded threshold

TPIU signal fault

GPS antenna comm fault cleared

GPS antenna position known

GPS power fault cleared

GPS system OK

GPS is tracking satellites

GPS input is enabled

LOS fault cleared

Frequency within threshold

Phase error within threshold

Excessive discontinuity cleared

FFOFF within threshold

MTIE within threshold

TPIU signal fault cleared

PRS and INP[p] Codes

Input disqualified as possible reference Input qualified as possible reference

AIS fault AIS fault cleared

LOS fault

OOF fault

LOS fault cleared

OOF fault cleared

Frequency threshold exceeded

Phase error exceeded threshold

Quality Level (SSM) exceeded threshold

Frequency within threshold

Phase error within threshold

Quality Level (SSM) within threshold

097-58001-02 Revision G – April 2008

TimeProvider User’s Guide 175

Chapter 6 Maintaining and Troubleshooting the TimeProvider

Troubleshooting the TimeProvider

Table 6-6. Set and Clear Conditions for Alarms (Continued)

Alarm ID

INPTRR

EXDSC

MTIE

OUTFAIL

SYNTHEOR

SYNTHFAIL

E422EQPT

E422FAULT

RTMEQPT

S1LOS

S2LOS

EXSLIP

RTMFAULT

Set Alarm Conditional Description

Tip/ring reversal on CC input

Excessive discontinuity fault

MTIE exceeded threshold

OUT[g] Codes

Clear Alarm Conditional Description

Tip/ring connection correct on CC input

Excessive discontinuity cleared

MTIE within threshold

Output fault Output fault cleared

Output generator exceeds pull-in range Output generator within pull-in range

Output generator failed Output generator restored

E422[g] Codes

EIA-422 Output module is unequipped EIA-422 Output module is equipped

EIA-422 Output module has a fault EIA-422 Output module fault cleared

RTMg[-p] Codes

Retimer module is unequipped

Side 1 LOS fault

Side 2 LOS fault

Slip rate threshold exceeded

Retimer module has a fault

Retimer module is equipped

Side 1 LOS fault cleared

Side 2 LOS fault cleared

Slip rate within threshold

Retimer module fault cleared

Using Alarm Codes to Troubleshoot

Table 6-7 lists the alarm codes generated by the TimeProvider. Unless specified,

each alarm has a default Error Delay of Immediate, and you cannot edit the Error

Delay.

Table 6-7. Alarm Codes

Event ID Description

AID

TYPE

Service

Affecting SSU

Mode

Alarm Level

PRR

Mode

SUB

Mode

AID = SYS

COMPAT System components (hardware or software) are incompatible.

EQPT NSA MJ MJ MJ

176 TimeProvider User’s Guide

097-58001-02 Revision G – April 2008

Chapter 6 Maintaining and Troubleshooting the TimeProvider

Troubleshooting the TimeProvider

Table 6-7. Alarm Codes (Continued)

Event ID

EXTALM

1

EXTALM

2

EXPN

EQPT

PWRA

PWRB

IOC1

EQPT

IOC2

EQPT

IOC1

COMM

IOC2

COMM

IMCFAIL

Description

AID

TYPE

Service

Affecting

NSA

SSU

Mode

MJ

Alarm Level

PRR

Mode

MJ

SUB

Mode

MJ External alarm 1 – monitors alarms generated by external equipment.

External alarm 2 – monitors alarms generated by external equipment.

Output Expansion Panel has been removed or installed

Loss of power on PWRA.

Loss of power on PWRB.

The IOC has been physically inserted or removed from the shelf.

The IOC has been physically inserted or removed from the shelf.

EQPT

EQPT

EQPT

EQPT

EQPT

EQPT

EQPT

NSA

NSA

NSA

NSA

NSA

NSA

Communication alarm with

IOC1.

Communication alarm with IOC2.

AID = IMC

EQPT NSA

EQPT NSA

CR

MJ

MJ

MJ

MJ

MJ

MN

MN

CR

MJ

MJ

MJ

MJ

MJ

MN

MN

CR

MJ

MJ

MJ

MJ

MJ

MN

MN

Summary alarm of IMC BIST faults.

EQPT SA MJ MJ MJ

AID = IOC1

IOC1

COMM

Communication alarm with IMC and IOC1.

IOC1TO2

COMM

Communication alarm from

IOC1 to IOC2.

IOCFAIL Summary alarm for IOC hardware failures not specified in other alarms.

BTBCK

UP

All BesTime backup sources are unusable to the BesTime engine.

EQPT

EQPT

EQPT

EQPT

NSA

NSA

SA

NSA

MN

MN

MJ

NA

MN

MN

MN

NA

MN

MN

MJ

NA

097-58001-02 Revision G – April 2008

TimeProvider User’s Guide 177

Chapter 6 Maintaining and Troubleshooting the TimeProvider

Troubleshooting the TimeProvider

Table 6-7. Alarm Codes (Continued)

Event ID

CLK

BRDG

CLK

HOLD

CLK

FREE

CLK

WARM

SYNTH

EOR

Description

AID

TYPE

Service

Affecting

NSA

SSU

Mode

NA

Alarm Level

PRR

Mode

NA

SUB

Mode

MJ Local oscillator in the specified

IOC is in Bridging mode.

Local oscillator in the specified

IOC is in Holdover mode.

Local oscillator in the specified

IOC is in the Free-run mode.

Local oscillator in the specified

IOC is in the Warm-up mode.

Synthesizer generating the output frequency has reached a defined End-of-Range for the oscillator.

EQPT

EQPT

EQPT

EQPT

EQPT

SA

SA

SA

SA

AID = IOC2

CLK

BRDG

CLK

HOLD

CLK

FREE

CLK

WARM

SYNTH

EOR

IOC2

COMM

IOC2TO

1 COMM

Communication alarm with IMC and IOC2.

Communication alarm from

IOC2 to IOC1.

IOCFAIL Summary alarm for IOC hardware failures not specified in other alarms.

BTBCK

UP

All BesTime backup sources are unusable to the BesTime engine.

Local oscillator in the specified

IOC is in Bridging mode.

Local oscillator in the specified

IOC is in Holdover mode.

Local oscillator in the specified

IOC is in the Free-run mode.

Local oscillator in the specified

IOC is in the Warm-up mode.

EQPT

EQPT

EQPT

EQPT

EQPT

EQPT

EQPT

EQPT

NSA

NSA

SA

NSA

NSA

SA

SA

SA

Synthesizer generating the output frequency has reached a defined End- of-Range for the oscillator.

EQPT

AID = GPS

SA

MJ

MJ

MN

MJ

MN

MN

MJ

NA

NA

MJ

MJ

MN

MJ

MJ

MJ

MN

MJ

MN

MN

MJ

NA

NA

MJ

MJ

MN

MJ

MJ

MJ

MN

MJ

MN

MN

MJ

NA

MJ

MJ

MJ

MN

MJ

178 TimeProvider User’s Guide

097-58001-02 Revision G – April 2008

Chapter 6 Maintaining and Troubleshooting the TimeProvider

Troubleshooting the TimeProvider

Table 6-7. Alarm Codes (Continued)

Event ID Description

AID

TYPE

Service

Affecting

NSA

SSU

Mode

MN

Alarm Level

PRR

Mode

MN

SUB

Mode

MN ANT

COMM

GPS

POS

GPS antenna fault due to loss of communications.

The GPS antenna position is unknown.

GPS

PWR

The current to the TPIU is either too high or too low.

GPSSYS An error occurred with BIST,

TRAIM, and/or UTC/ ephemeris data.

GPSTRK The GPS engine is not tracking any satellites.

INPDISQ The specified input has been disqualified or qualified as a possible system reference. The fault condition must be continuously present for the

FLTDELAY period before disqualifying the input as a possible reference. Once set, this alarm clears when the input is fault-free for the CLRDELAY period.

INPLOS The 1 PPS signal has a LOS fault. The fault must be continuously present for the FLTDELAY period before disqualifying the input as a possible reference.

Once set, this alarm clears when the input is fault-free for the

CLRDELAY period.

INPFRQ The specified input port’s calculated received frequency is exceeding the pull-in range of the LO. This condition disqualifies the input as a possible reference. Once set, this alarm clears when the input frequency is within the defined pull-in range limits.

EQPT

EQPT

T1

EQPT

EQPT

T1

T1

T1

NSA

NSA

NSA

NSA

NSA

NSA

NA

NA

MN

MN

MN

MN

MN

NA

NA

MN

MN

MN

MN

MN

NA

NA

MN

MN

MN

MN

MN

NA

097-58001-02 Revision G – April 2008

TimeProvider User’s Guide 179

Chapter 6 Maintaining and Troubleshooting the TimeProvider

Troubleshooting the TimeProvider

Table 6-7. Alarm Codes (Continued)

Event ID Description

AID

TYPE

Service

Affecting SSU

Mode

MN INP

PHASE

EXDSC

The specified input port has an excessive phase measurement that disqualifies it from being used.

The input has had excessive discontinuities, indicated by more than 3 signal faults of the same type within a 5-minute window. The alarm clears when the window contains less than 3 alarms of the same type.

FFOFF

MTIE

The specified input port has exceeded the Fractional

Frequency Offset threshold.

The specified input port has exceeded at least 1 of the MTIE alarm thresholds.

TPIUSIG The interface to the TPIU has a connectivity issue.

T1

T1

T1

T1

T1

NSA

NSA

NSA

NSA

NSA

INPDISQ The specified input port has been disqualified or qualified as a possible system reference.

The fault condition must be continuously present for the

FLTDELAY period before disqualifying the input as a possible reference. Once set, this alarm clears when the input is fault-free for the CLRDELAY period.

AID = PRS

T1 NSA

INPLOS The specified input port has a

LOS. When detected, the input is immediately removed as a possible reference. The LOS must be continuously present for the FLT-

DELAY period before disqualifying the input as a possible reference. The alarm clears when the input signal is fault-free for the CLRDELAY period.

T1 NSA

MN

MN

MN

MN

MN

MN

Alarm Level

PRR

Mode

MN

MN

MN

MN

MN

MN

MN

SUB

Mode

MN

MN

MN

MN

MN

MN

MN

180 TimeProvider User’s Guide

097-58001-02 Revision G – April 2008

Chapter 6 Maintaining and Troubleshooting the TimeProvider

Troubleshooting the TimeProvider

Table 6-7. Alarm Codes (Continued)

Event ID Description

AID

TYPE

Service

Affecting

NSA

SSU

Mode

MN

Alarm Level

PRR

Mode

MN

SUB

Mode

MN INPFRQ The specified input port’s calculated received frequency exceeds the pull-in range of the

LO. This alarm disqualifies an input as a system reference.

Once set, this alarm clears when the input frequency is within the defined pull-in range limits.

INP

PHASE

The specified input port has an excessive phase measurement that disqualifies it from being used.

EXDSC

FFOFF

MTIE

The specified input has had excessive discontinuities, indicated by more than 3 signal faults of the same type within a

5-minute window. The alarm clears when the window contains less than 3 alarms of the same type.

The specified input port has exceeded the Fractional

Frequency Offset threshold.

The specified input port has exceeded at least 1 of the MTIE alarm thresholds.

T1

T1

T1

T1

T1

NSA

NSA

NSA

NSA

AID = INP1 or INP2

T1 NSA INPDISQ The specified input port has been disqualified as a possible system reference. The fault condition must be continuously present for the FLTDELAY period before disqualifying the input as a possible reference.

Once set, this alarm clears when the input is fault-free for the CLRDELAY period.

MN

MN

MN

MN

MN

MN

MN

MN

MN

MN

MN

MN

MN

MN

MN

097-58001-02 Revision G – April 2008

TimeProvider User’s Guide 181

Chapter 6 Maintaining and Troubleshooting the TimeProvider

Troubleshooting the TimeProvider

Table 6-7. Alarm Codes (Continued)

Event ID Description

INPAIS The specified input port has an

AIS. When detected, the input is immediately removed as a possible reference. The AIS must be continuously present for the FLTDELAY period before disqualifying the input as a possible reference. Once set, this alarm clears when the input signal is fault-free for the CLRDE-

LAY period.

INPLOS The specified input port has a

LOS. When detected, the input is immediately removed as a possible reference. The LOS must be continuously present for the FLT-

DELAY period before disqualifying the input as a possible reference. The alarm clears when the input signal is fault-free for the CLRDELAY period.

INPOOF The specified input port has an

OOF. When detected, the input is immediately removed as a possible reference. The OOF must be continuously present for the FLTDELAY period before disqualifying the input as a possible reference. The alarm clears when the input signal is fault-free for the CLRDELAY period.

INPFRQ The specified input port’s calculated received frequency exceeds the pull-in range of the

LO. This alarm disqualifies an input as a system reference.

Once set, this alarm clears when the input frequency is within the defined pull-in range limits.

INP

PHASE

Specified input port has an excessive phase measurement that disqualifies it.

T1

T1

T1

T1

T1

AID

TYPE

Service

Affecting

NSA

SSU

Mode

MN

Alarm Level

PRR

Mode

MN

SUB

Mode

MN

NSA

NSA

NSA

NSA

MN

MN

MN

MN

MN

MN

MN

MN

MN

MN

NR

MN

182 TimeProvider User’s Guide

097-58001-02 Revision G – April 2008

Chapter 6 Maintaining and Troubleshooting the TimeProvider

Troubleshooting the TimeProvider

Table 6-7. Alarm Codes (Continued)

Event ID Description

AID

TYPE

Service

Affecting

NSA

SSU

Mode

MN

Alarm Level

PRR

Mode

MN

SUB

Mode

MN INPQL The received SSM on the specified input is of lesser quality than the local oscillator’s

QLEVEL.

INPTRR Specified input port has a

Tip/Ring reversal on its connection to the system.

EXDSC

MTIE

Specified input port has excessive discontinuities, indicated by more than 3 signal faults of the same time within 5 minutes.

Alarm clears when there are less than 3 faults in a 5 minute period.

The specified input port has exceeded at least 1 of the MTIE alarm thresholds.

T1

T1

T1

T1

NSA

NSA

NSA

AID = E422A, E422B, E422C, E422D

MN

MN

MN

MN

MN

MN

MN

MN

MN

E422

FAULT

The EIA-422 Output is not functioning properly.

T1 NSA NA

AID = RTMA[-p], RTMB[-p], RTMC[-p], RTMD[-p]

NA NA

S1LOS

S2LOS

EXSLIP

RTM

FAULT

LOS on Side 1

LOS on Side 2

Excessive Slip Rate

The Retimer module is not functioning properly.

T1

T1

T1

T1

NSA

NSA

NSA

NSA

MN

NA

NA

NA

MN

NA

NA

NA

Mn

NA

NA

NA

097-58001-02 Revision G – April 2008

TimeProvider User’s Guide 183

Chapter 6 Maintaining and Troubleshooting the TimeProvider

Troubleshooting the TimeProvider

Table 6-8 describes the conditions that generate the associated event.

IPHOST4

IPSUB

ISDIFF

ISEQ

LOGECHO

LOGIN

LOGOUT

PIDCHG

RESET

ALMCHG

AOMERGE

BAUD

CMDCHG

ECHO

FLOW

FWFAIL

FWOK

IMCBIST

INACTTIME

INITLOG

IPADDR

IPGATE

IPHOST1

IPHOST2

IPHOST3

Table 6-8. Conditions Causing an Event

Event ID

ACCLVL

ACO

Condition

User Access Level has changed

Audio alarm is deactivated

IMC Codes

Alarm parameter has changed <keyword>,<alarm>

Autonomous event reporting has changed <state>

Serial port baud rate has changed <value>

Command access level has changed <command>

Serial port echo mode has changed <state>

Serial port flow control has changed <state>

Firmware upgrade unsuccessful

Firmware upgrade successful

User has requested the IMC to perform a Built-in Self Test

Communications timeout has changed <value>

Event log has been cleared

IP address has changed <value>

Gateway IP address has changed <value>

The IMC Ethernet address for element host manager has changed <value>

The IMC Ethernet address for element host manager has changed <value>

The IMC Ethernet address for element host manager has changed <value>

The IMC Ethernet address for element host manager has changed <value>

Subnet mask IP address has changed <value>

Configuration images are different

Configuration images are the same

Login event has changed <state>

User logged in <username>

User logged out <username>

User password has changed

Module has been reset

184 TimeProvider User’s Guide

097-58001-02 Revision G – April 2008

Chapter 6 Maintaining and Troubleshooting the TimeProvider

Troubleshooting the TimeProvider

Table 6-8. Conditions Causing an Event (Continued)

Event ID

SIDCHG

UIDCHG

USRADD

USRDEL

XFERFAIL

XFEROK

MODE

POS

ELEVMASK

CCALIGN

CLKTYPE

INPREF

IOCMODE

IOCSTATE

RESET

SYSMODE

CLKFSTLK

CLKLOCK

SCAVAIL

CRCENA

FRMTYPE

INSTATE

PMCLR

PRIORITY

Condition

Source ID has been changed <value>

User’s name has been changed

User has been added

Specified user has been deleted, or all users have been deleted

Configuration transfer failed <fromdev> <todev>

Configuration transfer successful <fromdev> <todev>

GPS Codes

User has set or requested system position, or position has been automatically found <mode>

User has set or requested Lat/Lon/Ht of GPS antenna <location>

User has set or requested the GPS Elevation Mask <mask>

IOC Codes

User has cleared the INTPRR alarm, or has cleared the alarm and forced the alignment between the CC output and a CC input

Clock type has changed <state>

Specified input is selected as system reference <input>

IOC mode is <mode>

IOC state has changed <state>

Module has been reset

System mode of operation has changed <state>

IOC Clock Events

Clock entered Fast-lock mode

Clock entered Lock mode

SmartClock algorithm <value>

IOC Input Events

Input CRC has changed <value>

Input framing type has changed <value>

Input state has changed <value>

Performance data has been cleared

Priority has changed <value>

097-58001-02 Revision G – April 2008

TimeProvider User’s Guide 185

Chapter 6 Maintaining and Troubleshooting the TimeProvider

Troubleshooting the TimeProvider

Table 6-8. Conditions Causing an Event (Continued)

Event ID

RQLEVEL

QLEVEL

SSMBIT

SSENA

MTIE-1

MTIE-5

MTIE-10

MTIE-50

MTIE-100

MTIE-500

FRMTYPE

FREEFLT

HOLDFLT

OUTSTATE

CLRDELAY

ELEVTIME

FACTORY

FLTDELAY

GPSCLRDEL

GPSFLTDEL

INPREF

LOCTIM

REFMODE

TIMCHG

UTC

Condition

Received quality level has changed <value>

Quality Level has changed <value>

E1 SSM bit has changed <bit position>

Input reading of SSM has changed <value>

MTIE 1-second threshold has been exceeded

MTIE 5-second threshold has been exceeded

MTIE 10-second threshold has been exceeded

MTIE 50-second threshold has been exceeded

MTIE 100-second threshold has been exceeded

MTIE 500-second threshold has been exceeded

IOC Output Events

Output framing type has changed <value>

Free-run output fault strategy has changed <value>

Holdover output fault strategy has changed <state>

Output group state has changed <value>

SYS Events

Input clear delay has changed <value>

Alarm elevation time has changed <state>

Provisioned to factory defaults

Input fault delay has changed <value>

GPS fault delay has changed <value>

GPS fault delay has changed <value>

System reference input has changed <value>

System’s local time offset has changed <time offset>

System reference mode has changed <mode>

System time has changed <time>

UTC time has been set by GPS <time>

186 TimeProvider User’s Guide

097-58001-02 Revision G – April 2008

Chapter 6 Maintaining and Troubleshooting the TimeProvider

Repairing the TimeProvider

Repairing the TimeProvider

Repairing the TimeProvider is limited to replacing cards. Refer to Working With

Cards , on page 82, for information on how to properly handle cards and modules to

prevent electrostatic or physical damage.

To remove an IOC, loosen the captive screws and lift the removal tabs on each side of the card, then slide the module out of the shelf. To remove the IMC, loosen the captive screws and pull the module out of the shelf using the U-shaped handle on the front panel. Place the module on an anti-static surface or in an anti-static bag.

To remove an Input or Output module, loosen the captive screws and then pull the module using the captive screw. Place the module on an anti-static surface or in an anti-static bag.

Warning: To avoid possible electrostatic damage to the module or panel, place it in a static-free bag or on a static-free surface.

Obtaining Technical Assistance

If you have technical questions about the TimeProvider, call Symmetricom Global

Services (SGS) at 888-367-7966 (toll-free in USA only), 408-428-7907, or

+49 700 3288 6435 in Europe, Middle East, or Africa. You can also email your technical questions to [email protected] or [email protected].

Upgrading the Firmware

You can upgrade the firmware in the IMC or IOC using TL1 commands and software available from Symmetricom. Only users with Admin-level or Security-level access can execute the command. The command places the management module in the firmware download mode and terminates all sessions except the session performing the upgrade. During the upgrade process, no new sessions are allowed. Refer to the TL1 Reference Guide for details on the upgrade process.

Caution: To avoid a possible service call, do not issue any additional

TL1 commands to the TimeProvider, do not remove power from the

TimeProvider, and do not remove an IOC or IMC from the shelf during the firmware upgrade process (minimum 30 minutes). Doing so could corrupt the flash memory in a card, disabling the TimeProvider.

Use the following TL1 command to download the firmware.

097-58001-02 Revision G – April 2008

TimeProvider User’s Guide 187

Chapter 6 Maintaining and Troubleshooting the TimeProvider

Upgrading the Firmware

ACT-SWDL:[<tid>]:<aid>:[<ctag>];

After you issue the command, you have 60 seconds to begin transferring the upgrade file using the Ymodem transfer protocol. If you do not start the transfer within 60 seconds, the command times out and you will have to issue the

ACT-SWDL command again. You can use the SynCraft application to transfer the upgrade file; be sure to follow the recommendations in the Caution, above.

The system downloads the firmware using the Ymodem protocol; if the IMC firmware is upgraded, the processor in the IMC is reset.

<aid>

IMC

IOC

IOCm m = 1 | 2

Description

Downloads a new firmware image to the IMC.

If the IMC or IOC provisioning has changed in the newly upgraded firmware, you may need to issue the CPY-MEM command from an in-service IOC to the IMC before the

IMC is fully functional. See the TimeProvider TL1 Reference Guide for more details.

Downloads a new firmware image to the IOC.

Symmetricom recommends that redundant IOCs use the same firmware revision.

The Active IOC enters Standby mode, putting the second IOC in Active mode. After acknowledging the changeover, the IMC starts the firmware transfer to the Standby IOC.

After the download, the Standby IOC must achieve Lock (CLKLOCK) mode before changing again to Active mode. The Standby IOC is then upgraded.

If the first IOC upgrade is not successful, the entire process is aborted and an SROF error message is generated. The IOC restarts with the existing firmware.

Downloads the IOC firmware image from the Active IOC to the Standby IOC.

This command does not require Ymodem or SynCraft to transfer an image file from the computer to the TimeProvider.

Sample Command

ACT-SWDL::IMC:TP1000;

If the image transfer takes more than 60 seconds to start, the error response is

SROF and the IMC returns to normal operation. You will need to start the download process again to perform the upgrade.

If the header information in the referenced file is not correct, the error response is

SROF, followed by a message that says the firmware upgrade was not successful.

If the file header is correct, the TimeProvider responds with a message stating that it is beginning the firmware upgrade, followed by a message stating the upgrade was successful.

188 TimeProvider User’s Guide

097-58001-02 Revision G – April 2008

Chapter 6 Maintaining and Troubleshooting the TimeProvider

Upgrading the Firmware

Upgrading the IMC

To upgrade the software in the IMC, use the following procedure. You must have the upgrade software available on diskette or other media, as well as a Ymodem file-transfer program such as SynCraft available before you begin the procedure.

Outputs are not affected during the IMC upgrade procedure.

1. Log in to the TimeProvider with an Admin- or Security-level user id and password.

2. Back up the contents of the IMC memory in an IOC by issuing the following command:

CPY-MEM:::::IMC,IOC,IMC;

3. To start the download, issue the command

ACT-SWDL::IMC:TP1000;

The TimeProvider issues an In-Process response, the TL1 connection closes, and the TimeProvider waits to receive the upgrade software using the Ymodem protocol.

4. Use a Ymodem file transfer program such as SynCraft to transfer the upgrade software to the TimeProvider. You must start the transfer within 60 seconds or the

TimeProvider issues a Deny response.

The TimeProvider validates the received file, updates the flash memory and reboots the IMC if the file is valid. If the file is not valid, the TimeProvider issues a

Deny response.

5. The COMPLD message appears after a successful transfer.

Upgrading the IOC

This section contains procedures for upgrading a shelf with a single IOC and for upgrading a shelf with redundant IOCs.

Upgrading Single IOCs

To upgrade the software in a single IOC, use the procedure in this section. Outputs from the TimeProvider will be interrupted for up to 30 minutes until the upgraded

IOC enters the Locked mode.

1. Log in to the TimeProvider with an Admin- or Security-level user id and password.

2. Save the contents of the IOC memory in the IMC by issuing the command:

CPY-MEM:::::IOC,IMC,IOC;

097-58001-02 Revision G – April 2008

TimeProvider User’s Guide 189

Chapter 6 Maintaining and Troubleshooting the TimeProvider

Upgrading the Firmware

3. To start the download, issue the command

ACT-SWDL::IMC:TP1000;

The TimeProvider issues an In-Process response, the TL1 connection closes, and the TimeProvider waits to receive the upgrade software using the Ymodem protocol.

4. Use a Ymodem file transfer program such as SynCraft to transfer the upgrade software to the TimeProvider. You must start the transfer within 60 seconds or the

TimeProvider issues a Deny response. The new software is loaded into the IOC, after which it is rebooted and enters the Warm-up mode for up to 30 minutes.

5. The COMPLD message appears after a successful transfer.

6. Restore the contents of the IOC memory from the IMC by issuing the command:

CPY-MEM:::::IMC,IOC,IOC;

Upgrading Redundant IOCs

To avoid output interruptions, the TimeProvider must be in the following state:

Two installed and communicating IOCs

Both IOCs are in the Locked mode

Both IOCs are In Service

Both IOCs are alarm-free

One IOC is Active

If any of these conditions are not present, then the outputs are interrupted for up to

30 minutes until the upgraded IOC enters the Locked mode.

To upgrade the software in both IOCs, use the following procedure:

1. Log in to the TimeProvider with an Admin- or Security-level user id and password.

2. Back up the contents of the IOC memory in the IMC by issuing the command:

CPY-MEM:::::IOC,IMC,IOC;

3. Start the download by issuing the command:

ACT-SWDL::IMC;

The TimeProvider issues an In-Process response, the TL1 connection closes, and the TimeProvider waits to receive the upgrade software using the Ymodem protocol.

190 TimeProvider User’s Guide

097-58001-02 Revision G – April 2008

Chapter 6 Maintaining and Troubleshooting the TimeProvider

Returning the TimeProvider

4. Use a Ymodem file transfer program such as SynCraft to transfer the upgrade software to the TimeProvider. You must start the transfer within 60 seconds or the

TimeProvider issues a Deny response.

The active IOC (IOC1 for example) goes into Standby mode and the Standby

IOC (IOC2, in this example) goes into Active mode. The new software is loaded into IOC1, after which it is rebooted and enters the Warm-up mode for up to 30 minutes.

When IOC1 enters the Locked mode, it becomes the Active IOC again (IOC2 goes into Standby). The new software is loaded into IOC2, after which it is rebooted and enters the Warm-up mode for up to 30 minutes.

5. The COMPLD message appears after a successful transfer.

Upgrading One IOC From the Other

To upgrade the software in one IOC to match the software in the other IOC, issue the command:

ACT-SWDL::IOCn:TP1000; where n = 1 or 2, and identifies the IOC that receives the software from the other

IOC

You cannot upgrade the software in the Active IOC.

Returning the TimeProvider

You should return the equipment to Symmetricom only after you have exhausted the troubleshooting procedures described earlier in this chapter, or if Symmetricom

Global Services has advised you to return the unit.

Note: Please retain the original packaging for re-shipping the product. If the original packaging is not available, contact

Symmetricom Global Services (SGS) for assistance.

Repacking the Unit

Return all units in the original packaging. If the original packaging is not available, contact Symmetricom Global Services. Use standard packing procedures for products being returned for repair to protect the equipment during shipment.

Connectors should be protected with connector covers or the equipment should be wrapped in plastic before packaging. Ensure that the display and connectivity panels are protected when packaged.

097-58001-02 Revision G – April 2008

TimeProvider User’s Guide 191

Chapter 6 Maintaining and Troubleshooting the TimeProvider

Manual Updates

Equipment Return Procedure

To return equipment to Symmetricom for repair:

1. Call Symmetricom Global Services (SGS) at 888-367-7966 (toll-free in USA only),

408-428-7907, or +49 700 3288 6435 in Europe, Middle East, or Africa to obtain a return material authorization number (RMA) before returning the product for service.

You can request an RMA on the internet at https://www.symmetricom.com/Support/req_repair.htm.

Retain the assigned RMA number for future reference.

2. Provide a description of the problem, product item number, serial number, and warranty expiration date.

3. Provide the return shipping information (customer field contact, address, telephone number, and so forth.)

4. Ship the product to Symmetricom, transportation prepaid and insured, with the

Return Material Authorization (RMA) number and item numbers or part numbers clearly marked on the outside of the container to the address given with the RMA.

Repaired equipment is returned to you with shipping costs prepaid by

Symmetricom.

Manual Updates

From time to time, this manual may be updated. The current version of the manual is available for downloading in pdf format at Symmetricom’s website at www.symmetricom.com

. After you download a manual, you can view it on your computer screen or you can print it out.

Note: If you are downloading a manual for the first time, you need to register on Symmetricom’s website. If you are currently registered, log in and download the manual update.

192 TimeProvider User’s Guide

097-58001-02 Revision G – April 2008

Chapter 7 Specifications of the TimeProvider

This chapter describes the specifications of the TimeProvider.

In This Chapter

Communications Ports

Clocks

Inputs

Outputs

Alarms

Power

Roof Antenna

Mechanical

Environmental

097-58001-02 Revision G – April 2008

TimeProvider User’s Guide 193

Chapter 7 Specifications of the TimeProvider

Communications Ports

Communications Ports

Serial Ports

Two EIA-232 serial ports are available: the local Craft port and the Remote port.

Specifications are listed in Table 7-1

.

Table 7-1. Serial Port Specifications

Specification

Baud rate

Factory Default

9600

Word length

Parity

Stop bits

Echo

8 bits

None

1

Off

Software flow control

XON/XOFF

Hardware flow control CTS/RTS

Off

Off

RS-232 configuration DCE

Off, On

DCE

Available

Local Craft Port

2400, 9600, 19200, 28800,

34800, 57600, 115200

8 bits

None, Odd, Even

1

Off, On

Off, On

Remote Port

Baud rate

Word length

Parity

Stop bits

Echo

9600

Software flow control

XON/XOFF

Hardware flow control CTS/RTS

Off

Handshake

DTR/DSR

On

RS-232 configuration DTE

8 bits

None

1

Off

Off

2400, 9600, 19200, 28800,

34800, 57600, 115200

8 bits

None, Odd, Even

1

Off, On

Off, On

Off, On

On

DTE

194 TimeProvider User’s Guide

097-58001-02 Revision G – April 2008

Chapter 7 Specifications of the TimeProvider

Clocks

LAN Port

The Ethernet 10BaseT port supports 10 full-duplex telnet sessions over TCP/IP. To minimize response delays, Symmetricom recommends that you keep four or fewer sessions open at any one time.

Clocks

The clocks in the TimeProvider are controlled with Direct Digital Synthesis technology for calibration-free operation and precise frequency control.

Type I Clock

The Type I clock in the TimeProvider is compliant with ITU-T G.812 (06/98) and

EN300 462-4-1 (see ICS proforma Compliance Annex B).

Type II Clock

The Type II clock in the TimeProvider complies with G.812 (06/98).

Type III Clock

The Type III clock in the TimeProvider complies with G.812 (06/98).

Type ST2 Clock

The Stratum 2 clock in the TimeProvider complies with ETSI 300 462-4, ANSI

T1.101-1999, and Telcordia GR-378/1244-CORE.

Type ST3E Clock

The Stratum 3E clock in the TimeProvider complies with ETSI 300 462-4, ANSI

T1.101-1999, and Telcordia GR-378/1244-CORE.

SSM Compliance

The TimeProvider complies with the following SSM standards: ANSI T1.101-1999,

GR-253 Core Issue 3, September 2000, ITU-T G.704 10.98, and T1X1.3 TR33.

Holdover

Table 7-2 lists the holdover characteristics of the Clock cards available for the

TimeProvider.

Table 7-2. Holdover Characteristics

Card Type

Single Oven

090-58021-01

Rubidium

090-58022-01

097-58001-02 Revision G – April 2008

Holdover Performance

PRR Mode

GR-2830-CORE Issue 2

Office PRS

GR-2830-CORE Issue 2

Office PRS

Holdover Performance

SSU Mode

GR-1244-CORE Issue 2 ST3E or

ITU-G.812 Type I (6/98)

GR-1244-CORE Issue 2 ST2 or

ITU-G.812 (6/98) Type II

TimeProvider User’s Guide 195

Chapter 7 Specifications of the TimeProvider

Inputs

Hold-in and Pull-in Range

Table 7-3 lists the default values for the Hold-in range and Pull-in range for the

Clock cards available for the TimeProvider.

Table 7-3. Hold-in and Pull-in Range

Clock Type

Type I (Quartz IOC only)

Type II/ST2 (Rb IOC only)

Type III/ST3E (Quartz IOC only)

Hold-in Range

9.8 E-6

4.0 E-8

9.8 E-6

Pull-in Range

9.3 E-6

3.5 E-8

9.3 E-6

Inputs

According to GR-1244, hold-in is the process by which an NE and its clocks maintain lock to the active reference as the frequency of that reference varies arbitrarily slowly. Thus, the hold-in range is the largest band of input signal frequency for which the NE and its clocks will maintain lock. As is the case for the pull-in range, the hold-in range is generally specified so that an NE/clock of a given stratum level will maintain lock with a reference that is traceable to a clock of the same stratum level.

According to GR-1244, pull-in is the process during which an NE's clocks become locked to a reference. In turn, an NE's pull-in range is the largest band of input reference signal frequency for which its clocks will acquire lock. In general, pull-in requirements are intended to assure that any NE/clock will always be able to lock to a reference signal that is traceable to a clock of equal (or higher) quality. Therefore, for a given stratum level the minimum pull-in range is generally the same as the maximum acceptable free-run frequency offset.

Front Access and Rear Access shelves contain three card slots: two for IOC cards and one for an IMC or integrated IMC/TPIU card.

Each IOC supports three input ports: two span inputs and one PRS input.

Input supported:

PRS Input port: 2048 kHz G.703/13, 1.544/5/6.312/10 MHz sine or square

Input ports 1 and 2: 2048 kbit/s,G.703/9, 2048 kHz G 703/13, DS1,

1.544/5/6.312/10 MHz sine or square, CC/JCC/JCC4 composite clock

196 TimeProvider User’s Guide

097-58001-02 Revision G – April 2008

Chapter 7 Specifications of the TimeProvider

Inputs

Table 7-4. Input Signal Specifications

Parameter Specification

PRS Inputs

Frequency

Japan Frequency

Amplitude

Japan Amplitude

Termination Impedance

2.048 MHz, 5 MHz, 10 MHz

1.544 MHz, 6.312 MHz

1 V RMS

±

3 dB

–17 dBm to +5 dBm

75

Ω

T1 Inputs

Framing

Bit Rate

Format

Amplitude Range

D4/SF or ESF (User Selectable)

1544 kbit/s

AMI or B8ZS (per (ANSI) T1.102 & ITU-T G.703 Sec. 5)

+3 to –24 dB DSX

Jitter and Wander Tolerance Meets the requirements of Bellcore GR-1244-CORE, Section 4.

E1 Inputs

Type

Bit Rate

Format

G.703 Sec. 9 Framed E1

2048 kbit/s

CAS or CCS (per ITU-TG.703 Sec. 2 & (ANSI) T1.102 DS1A CRC4 enabled/disabled AMI or HDB3)

Amplitude Range +3 to –27 dB DSX

Jitter and Wander Tolerance Meets the requirements of ITU-T G.823

Type G.703 Sec. 9 Framed E1

097-58001-02 Revision G – April 2008

TimeProvider User’s Guide 197

Chapter 7 Specifications of the TimeProvider

Outputs

Outputs

The TimeProvider supports up to 32 outputs. The optional Expansion Panel provides an additional 32 outputs. You can provision the outputs in groups of eight.

Sync Status Messages: Compliant with SSM specification ITU-T G.704, T1X1.3

TR33, ANSI T1.101-1999, and Telcordia GR-253-CORE

Table 7-5. Output Signal Specifications

Parameter

Framing (user selectable)

Signal Waveshape

Pulse Amplitude

Output Jitter

Termination Impedance

Framing (user selectable)

Signal Waveshape

Pulse Amplitude

Output Jitter

Termination Impedance

Amplitude

Waveform

Termination Impedance

Amplitude

Termination Impedance

Specification

T1 Signals

D4/Super Frame (SF)

Extended Super Frame (ESF)

Framed, all ones, Alternate Mark Inversion (AMI) per (ANSI)

T1.102 and ITU Rec. G.703

2.4 to 3.6 volts peak into 100 V

< 0.03 UI

100

Ω ± 5% balanced

E1 Signals

CAS, CCS

Framed, all ones, Alternate Mark Inversion (AMI)

Per ITU Rec. G.703 Sec. 9

2.4 to 3.6 volts peak into 120

Ω

1.9 to 2.8 volts peak into 75

Ω

< 0.03 UI

120

Ω ± 5% balanced; 75 Ω ± 5% unbalanced

CC Signals

2.7 to 3.3 V p

Bipolar RTZ; all 1s with BPV every eighth pulse

133

Ω ± 5% balanced

JCC Signals

1.0 V p

±0.1 V

110

Ω

198 TimeProvider User’s Guide

097-58001-02 Revision G – April 2008

Chapter 7 Specifications of the TimeProvider

Outputs

Table 7-5. Output Signal Specifications (Continued)

Parameter

Amplitude

Termination Impedance

Amplitude

Termination Impedance

Amplitude

Wave Shape

Termination Impedance

Amplitude

Wave Shape

Termination Impedance

Amplitude

Termination Impedance

Wave Shape

Connector type

Jitter

Cable Length Drive

JCC4 Signals

1.0 V p

±0.1 V

110

Ω

8k Signals

4 V p-p ± 10%

100

Ω

1.544 MHz Signals

0 dBm ± 3 dB

Sine wave

75

Ω

6.312 MHz Signals

0 dBm ± 3 dB

Sine wave

75

Ω

Specification

TIA/EIA-B-422 Signals

2 to 6 V p-p

100

Ω balanced

Square wave, 50% duty cycle

Wire-wrap

< 0.03 UI

80 m (266 ft), using 24 AWG twisted pair

097-58001-02 Revision G – April 2008

TimeProvider User’s Guide 199

Chapter 7 Specifications of the TimeProvider

Alarms

Alarms

Input Alarms

The PRS input is inhibited when a contact closure (less than 1

Ω) is present across the PRS Alarm In connection.

Output Alarms

The output alarm connector is on the Input module, and can be either a DB25 connector or wire-wrap pins. See

Making Alarm Connections , on page 70 ,

for a

pinout diagram of the DB-25 connector. Table 7-6

describes the contact closure for the alarm outputs.

Table 7-6. Output Alarm Specifications

Alarm

Minor

Major

Critical

Description

Contact closure (NC or NO) 1 Amp Form C

Contact closure (NC or NO) 1 Amp Form C

Contact closure (NC or NO) 1 Amp Form C

Power

Dual power supplies from –36 to –72 V DC. Table 7-7 lists the maximum and typical

power consumption using crystal and Rubidium IOCs.

Table 7-7. Typical Power Consumption

IOC Type

Crystal

Rubidium

Max Power (W) per IOC

40

60

Typical Power (W) per IOC

30

40

(70 with two Rb IOCs)

Symmetricom recommends a 5 A fuse for the power supply to the TimeProvider shelf.

200 TimeProvider User’s Guide

097-58001-02 Revision G – April 2008

Chapter 7 Specifications of the TimeProvider

Roof Antenna

Roof Antenna

The specifications for the antenna for GPS operation are described in Table 7-8 .

Table 7-8. Antenna Specifications

Parameter

Type

Cable length

Dimensions

Weight

Operating Temperature

Storage Temperature

Operating Humidity

Specification

Active, with proprietary 2-way time transfer technology

Minimum 28 ft (8 m) from antenna to shelf

Maximum 1000 ft (305 m) from antenna to shelf

Height: 6.5 in (16.5 cm)

Diameter: 5.9 in (15 cm)

1.7 lb (0.77 kg)

–35 to 75

°

C

–40 to 80

°

C

0 to 100% relative humidity

Mechanical

TimeProvider 1000 Front-Access Shelf

Size: 431.8 mm wide x 175 mm high x 254 mm deep (17 in wide x 6.875 in high x

10 in deep)

Weight: 9.0 pounds (4.1 kg) with two IOC modules and four Output modules

TimeProvider 1100 Rear-Access Shelf

Size: 431.8 mm wide x 133 mm high x 254 mm deep (17 in wide x 5.25 in high x

10 in deep)

Weight: 9.0 pounds (4.1 kg) with two IOC modules and four Output modules

097-58001-02 Revision G – April 2008

TimeProvider User’s Guide 201

Chapter 7 Specifications of the TimeProvider

Environmental

Environmental

Operating Temperature: –5 to 55

°

C

Storage Temperature: –25 to 55

°

C, duration < 12 months

Operating Humidity: 5% to 85% non-condensing

Storage Humidity: 5% to 100% non-condensing, duration < 12 months

Altitude: –60 to 4000 m (–196 ft. to 13132 ft.)

Clock operation: ETSI EN 300 019-1-3 V2.1.2 Class 3.1

202 TimeProvider User’s Guide

097-58001-02 Revision G – April 2008

Appendix A Factory Default Values

This Appendix describes the factory default values for user-settable parameters.

In This Appendix

Default Command Access Levels

Alarm Default Values

Default Equipment Parameters

Default Input Parameters

Default Output Parameters

Default Retimer Parameters

097-58001-02 Revision G – April 2008

TimeProvider User’s Guide 203

Appendix A Factory Default Values

Default Command Access Levels

Default Command Access Levels

This section describes the default access level for the TL1 commands described in this guide.

Table A-1

also describes whether you can edit the default command access level using the ED-CMD-SECU command (see the TimeProvider TL1

Reference Guide for details on this command). For a complete list of commands and their access levels, see the TimeProvider TL1 Reference Guide.

Table A-1. Default Access Levels for TL1 Commands

Command

RTRV-USER-SECU

ENT-USR-SECU

ED-USER-SECU

ED-PID

ENT-PID

DLT-SECU

DLT-USR-SECU

RTRV-CMD-SECU

ED-CMD-SECU

CPY-MEM

RTRV-DAT

ED-DAT

RTRV-EQPT

ED-EQPT

RTRV-SYNC

ED-SYNC

RTRV-ATTR

SET-ATTR

RTRV-LOG

INIT-LOG

INIT-SYS

RTRV-SYS-MODE

SET-SYS-MODE

OPR-ACO-ALL

204 TimeProvider User’s Guide

Default Access Level

Admin

Admin

User

Admin

User

Admin

User

Admin

Security

Security

Security

Security

User

Security

Security

Admin

User

Admin

User

Admin

Admin

User

Admin

User

Editable?

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

No

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

No

No

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

097-58001-02 Revision G – April 2008

Appendix A Factory Default Values

Alarm Default Values

Table A-1. Default Access Levels for TL1 Commands (Continued)

Command

SET-SID

RTRV-ALM

RTRV-COND

RTRV-CRAFT

RTRV-HDR

RTRV-INV

ACT-USER

RTRV-USER

CANC-USER

PING

GEN-EVT

Default Access Level

Admin

User

User

User

None

User

None

User

User

User

User

Editable?

Yes

Yes

No

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

No

Yes

Yes

Alarm Default Values

This section describes the default values for alarms in the TimeProvider.

Table A-2

includes the default error delay, which is set using the FLTDELAY keyword in the

ED-SYNC command (see Provisioning System-Level Alarms , on page 130).

Table A-2. Default Alarm Settings

Alarm ID

COMPAT

EXTALM1

EXTALM2

EXPFAIL

PWRA

PWRB

IOC1EQPT

IOC2EQPT

097-58001-02 Revision G – April 2008

IMMED

IMMED

IMMED

IMMED

IMMED

IMMED

IMMED

IMMED

Default

Error Delay

Error Delay

Editable?

SSU Mode

Default Alarm Level

PRR Mode SUB Mode

System-wide Alarms

No

No

No

No

No

No

No

No

MJ

MJ

MJ

MJ

MJ

MJ

CR

MJ

MJ

MJ

CR

MJ

MJ

MJ

MJ

MJ

MJ

MJ

CR

MJ

MJ

MJ

MJ

MJ

TimeProvider User’s Guide 205

Appendix A Factory Default Values

Alarm Default Values

Table A-2. Default Alarm Settings (Continued)

Alarm ID

IOC1COMM

IOC2COMM

IMCFAIL

IOC1COMM IMMED

IOC1TO2COMM IMMED

IOCFAIL

BTBCKUP

IMMED

IMMED

CLKBRDG

CLKFREE

CLKHOLD

CLKWARM

SYNTHEOR

IMMED

IMMED

IMMED

IMMED

IMMED

IOC2COMM IMMED

IOC2TO1COMM IMMED

IOCFAIL

BTBCKUP

IMMED

IMMED

CLKBRDG

CLKFREE

CLKHOLD

CLKWARM

SYNTHEOR

IMMED

IMMED

IMMED

IMMED

IMMED

ANTCOMM

GPSPOS

GPSPWR

Default

Error Delay

IMMED

IMMED

IMMED

IMMED

FLTDELAY

IMMED

Error Delay

Editable?

SSU Mode

Default Alarm Level

PRR Mode SUB Mode

No

No

No

IMC-related Alarms

MN

MN

MJ

IOC1-related Alarms

No

No

No

No

No

No

No

No

No

IOC2-related Alarms

NA

MJ

MJ

MN

MJ

MN

MN

MJ

NA

No

No

No

No

No

No

No

No

No

NA

MJ

MJ

MN

MJ

MN

MN

MJ

NA

GPS-related Alarms

No

Yes

No

MN

NA

MN

MN

MN

MJ

MN

MN

MJ

NA

NA

MN

MJ

MN

MJ

MN

MN

MJ

NA

NA

MN

MJ

MN

MJ

MN

NA

MN

MN

MN

MJ

MN

MN

MJ

NA

NA

MJ

MJ

MN

MJ

MN

MN

MJ

NA

NA

MJ

MJ

MN

MJ

MN

NA

MN

206 TimeProvider User’s Guide

097-58001-02 Revision G – April 2008

Appendix A Factory Default Values

Alarm Default Values

Table A-2. Default Alarm Settings (Continued)

Alarm ID

GPSSYS

GPSTRK

INPDISQ

INPLOS

INPFRQ

INPPHASE

EXDSC

FFOFF

MTIE

TPIUSIG

INPDISQ

INPLOS

INPFRQ

INPPHASE

EXDSC

FFOFF

MTIE

INPDISQ

INPAIS

INPLOS

INPOOF

INPFRQ

INPPHASE

INPQL

EXDSC

MTIE

FLTDELAY

FLTDELAY

FLTDELAY

IMMED

NA

IMMED

IMMED

IMMED

IMMED

IMMED

Default

Error Delay

Error Delay

Editable?

SSU Mode

NA

No

No

No

Yes

Yes

Yes

No

No

No

PRS-related Alarms

NA

MN

MN

MN

MN

MN

MN

MN

MN

MN

Default Alarm Level

PRR Mode

NA

MN

MN

MN

MN

MN

MN

MN

MN

MN

SUB Mode

NA

MN

MN

MN

MN

MN

MN

MN

MN

MN

FLTDELAY

IMMED

IMMED

IMMED

IMMED

IMMED

IMMED

FLTDELAY

IMMED

IMMED

IMMED

IMMED

IMMED

IMMED

IMMED

IMMED

No

No

No

Yes

No

No

No

No

No

No

No

No

Yes

No

No

No

MN

MN

MN

MN

MN

MN

MN

INP1 or INP2-related Alarms

MN

MN

MN

MN

MN

MN

MN

MN

MN

MN

MN

MN

MN

MN

MN

MN

MN

MN

MN

MN

MN

MN

MN

MN

MN

MN

MN

NR

MN

MN

MN

MN

MN

MN

MN

MN

NR

MN

MN

MN

MN

097-58001-02 Revision G – April 2008

TimeProvider User’s Guide 207

Appendix A Factory Default Values

Default Equipment Parameters

Table A-2. Default Alarm Settings (Continued)

Alarm ID

E422FAULT

S1LOS

S2LOS

EXSLIP

RTMFAULT

Default

Error Delay

IMMED

IMMED

IMMED

IMMED

IMMED

Error Delay

Editable?

SSU Mode

Default Alarm Level

PRR Mode SUB Mode

No

E422-related alarms

NA

No

No

No

No

RTM-related Alarms

MN

NA

NA

NA

NA

MN

NA

NA

NA

NA

MN

NA

NA

NA

Default Equipment Parameters

Table A-3. Default Equipment Parameters

Parameter Default Value

System-Level Parameter (<aid>=SYS)

INACTTIME

LOGECHO

ELEVTIME

SYSMODE

0 (no timeout)

ENABLE

DISABLE

SSU

Local/Remote Comm Port Parameters (<aid>=COMp)

AOMERGE

BAUD

ECHO

FLOW

TIDQUIET

ENABLE

9600

DISABLE

NONE

DISABLE

Ethernet Parameters (<aid>=COMI)

AOMERGE

IPGATE

IPADDR

ENABLE

127.0.0.1

127.0.0.1

208 TimeProvider User’s Guide

097-58001-02 Revision G – April 2008

Appendix A Factory Default Values

Default Input Parameters

Table A-3. Default Equipment Parameters (Continued)

Parameter

IPSUBNET

ECHO

TIDQUIET

Default Value

255.255.255.0

DISABLE

DISABLE

IOC Parameters (<aid>=IOCm)

IOCMODE

CLKTYPE

IOCSTATE

ACTIVE

TYPEI

INSRV

Default Input Parameters

Table A-4. Default Input Parameters

Parameter Default Value

CLRDELAY

FLTDELAY

REFMODE

INPREF

FREEFLT

HOLDFLT

GPSCLRDEL

GPSFLTDEL

Input Parameters (<aid>=SYS)

5 seconds

5 seconds

AUTO

PRS

SQUELCH

ON

5 s

1 s

INSTATE

FRMTYPE

INSTATE

SPANTYPE

Input Parameters (<aid>=PRS)

ENABLE

2M (2048 kHz)

Input Parameters (<aid>=INPp)

ENABLE

E1

097-58001-02 Revision G – April 2008

TimeProvider User’s Guide 209

Appendix A Factory Default Values

Default Output Parameters

Table A-4. Default Input Parameters (Continued)

Parameter

FRMTYPE

DISABLE

DISABLE

8

Default Value

2M (for E1 span type)

ESF (for T1 span type)

CRCENA

SSMENA

SSMBIT

QLEVEL

PRIORITY

Input Parameters (<aid>=PRS, INPp)

2

PRS=1

INP1=1

INP2=1

Default Output Parameters

Table A-5. Default Output Parameters

Parameter Default Value

Output Parameters (<aid>=OUTg)

OUTSTATE

FRMTYPE

DISABLE

2M

E422 Output Parameters (<aid>=E422g)

CKTID

OUTSTATE

FRMTYPE

FREEFLT

HOLDFLT

Null

DISABLE

1.544M

SQUELCH

ON

210 TimeProvider User’s Guide

097-58001-02 Revision G – April 2008

Default Retimer Parameters

Table A-6. Default Retimer Parameters

Parameter Default Value

CKTID

RTMSTATE

RTMLBO

FREEFLT

HOLDFLT

RTMSLIP

Retimer Parameters (<aid>=RTMg)

NULL

ENABLE

0

RETIME

RETIME

4

Appendix A Factory Default Values

Default Retimer Parameters

097-58001-02 Revision G – April 2008

TimeProvider User’s Guide 211

Appendix A Factory Default Values

Default Retimer Parameters

212 TimeProvider User’s Guide

097-58001-02 Revision G – April 2008

Appendix B CRAFT Software Reference

This Appendix describes how to install the SynCraft software you can use to provision the TimeProvider.

In This Appendix

Overview

System Requirements

Installing SynCraft

097-58001-02 Revision G – April 2008

TimeProvider User’s Guide 213

Appendix B CRAFT Software Reference

Overview

Overview

SynCraft is a craft application for provisioning and managing the TimeProvider and other Network Elements via an Ethernet connection or a serial connection.

System Requirements

The following is the minimum computer configuration for a Windows NT 4.0 system:

Pentium III 200 MHz platform

128 MB RAM

200 MB hard disk

CD-ROM drive

1024 x 768 accelerated graphics

15" VGA monitor

Software

You can run the SynCraft application under the following operating systems:

Windows XP

Windows 2000 SP3 or later

Windows NT 4 SP5 or later

Windows ME5

Windows 98 Second Edition

Windows XP Professional Service Pack 1

You can download the following items from the Microsoft web site:

Windows NT 4 Service Pack 5

Windows 2000 Service Pack 3

Windows XP Service Pack 1

Documentation

To access the help files and associated documentation for SynCraft, press F1 at any time while in the application.

214 TimeProvider User’s Guide

097-58001-02 Revision G – April 2008

Appendix B CRAFT Software Reference

Installing SynCraft

Installing SynCraft

To install SynCraft on your computer, use the following procedure. You may need

Administrator-level privileges on the computer to install this product.

1. Insert the SynCraft CD into the CD-ROM drive. If the Auto-Run feature is not enabled, then open the SynCraft folder on the CD and double-click the

SynCraftSetup.exe icon. The Installation Wizard appears.

2. Follow the instructions that appear in the Installation Wizard.

097-58001-02 Revision G – April 2008

TimeProvider User’s Guide 215

Appendix B CRAFT Software Reference

Installing SynCraft

216 TimeProvider User’s Guide

097-58001-02 Revision G – April 2008

Index

Symbols

<pid>, see password

<sid>, see source ID

<uid>, see user ID

A access level changing

100

displaying

99

overview

94

TL1 commands, default

204

ACO, see alarm cutoff

ACT-FEATURE command

123

,

136

Active LED

157

active, IOC

107

ACT-SWDL command

188

ACT-USER command

96

adding a user

98

address gate

93

IP

93

alarm

ACO LED

163

clear delay

130

clearing audible

135

codes

174

communication

127

connecting

70

default values

205

displaying current active

132

displaying settings

131

displaying status

134

fault delay

130

IDs

126

LED, on IMC

162

LED, on IOC

157

levels, provisioning

126

list

205

208

local oscillator

128

overview

41

provisioning

126

136

setting PM thresholds

116

strategy, setting

151

system-level

130

alarm cutoff

135

antenna

163

installing

71

77

LEDs on TPIU

164

097-58001-02 Revision G – April 2008

lightning suppressor, installing

76

location, setting

109

specifications

201

assistance, technical

187

audible alarm, clearing

135

authentication, NTP, provisioning

124

automatic reference switching

111

B baud rate, setting

91

BesTime description

43

overview

24

bit position, SSMs

115

block diagram, system

31

block separator, command

86

bridging mode

32

C cables antenna to shelf

73

Ethernet

80

lightning suppressor

73

power

61

serial

79

TPIU

77

CANC-USER command

97

CAS inputs

110

CAS outputs

42

,

119

case-sensitive commands

86

cautions defined

16

CCS inputs

110

CCS outputs

42

,

119

changing access level

100

password

99

check list, installation

82

checking comm links, ping

94

circuitry damage, avoiding

156

cleaning the unit

156

clear delay, alarm

130

clearing the audible alarm

135

clock event ID

185

operating modes

32

overview

23

performance requirements

39

setting the type

107

TimeProvider User’s Guide 217

Index

D—E

specifications

195

colon, using in commands

86

comm links, ping command

94

comma, using in commands

86

command error response

87

general syntax

86

in-process response

87

normal response

87

command separators

86

communication settings, changing

80

compatibility alarm

158

configuration, displaying

139

connecting earth ground

60

connecting power

61

connections alarm

70

Ethernet port

80

input

63

output

66

serial port

79

connectors, location of

28

,

30

copying memory

141

craft serial port connecting to

79

overview

34

provisioning

91

92

testing

151

CRC4, enabling

116

Critical LED

162

current alarms, displaying

132

cut-thru, setting

122

D damage to circuitry, avoiding

156

date, setting

90

DB-9 output module pinout

66

default command access levels

204

default equipment parameters

208

default settings local serial port

79

remote serial port

79

deleting a user

101

disabled input state

35

disabling outputs

119

disabling the retimer

120

DLT-USER-SECU command

101

documentation, related

17

218 TimeProvider User’s Guide

E

E1 inputs, CRC4

116

E422 output default parameter values

210

earth grounding connections

60

echo in response

92

echo mode, setting

92

ED-DAT command

90

ED-EQPT command baud rate

91

CLKTYPE

107

,

123

cut-thru

122

echo

92

GPS parameters

109

handshaking

92

input state

108

IOCACTV

107

,

123

IOCMODE

107

,

123

IOCSTATE

107

,

123

IP addresses

93

LBO

121

output enabling

119

retimer enabling

120

tidquiet

92

,

93

ED-PID command

99

ED-SYNC command alarms, system-level

130

input frame type

110

input priority level

113

manual reference selection

114

output framing

119

quality level

113

reference switching mode

112

SSM bit position

115

SSM enabling

115

ED-USER-SECU command

100

electrostatic discharge

56

enable input state

35

enabling CRC4

116

enabling input SSMs

115

enabling outputs

119

enabling the retimer

120

ENT-USER-SECU command

98

environmental specifications

202

error response, TL1

87

escalating alarm levels

126

ESD considerations

156

ESF outputs

42

Ethernet overview

34

parameters

93

097-58001-02 Revision G – April 2008

ping command

94

port connections

80

testing

152

event ID clock

185

IMC

184

input

185

IOC

185

output

186

events displaying

138

troubleshooting with

167

186

expansion panel alarm

127

connections to

62

overview

21

troubleshooting

176

external alarm

127

troubleshooting

176

F factory default parameter values

208

Fail LED

IMC

162

IOC

157

fast-lock mode

32

fault delay, alarm

130

firmware, upgrading

187

first-time log-in

89

first-time power-up

89

flow mode, setting

92

forced reference switching

111

frame type inputs

110

outputs

119

free-run alarm, setting

130

free-run mode

32

frequency, input

110

front panel layout

28

,

30

fuse, power supply

200

G gate address

93

Global Services telephone/address

192

GPS alarm codes

175

antenna location, setting

109

holdover

44

installing antenna

71

77

parameters, ED-EQPT command

109

setting parameters

109

097-58001-02 Revision G – April 2008

Index

F—I

troubleshooting

178

GPS LED

157

GR-833 standard, date and time format

87

ground connections

60

grounding cable length

60

chassis

60

H handshake mode, setting

92

holdover alarm, setting

130

Holdover LED

157

holdover mode

32

holdover mode, clock

32

holdover, GPS

44

I

IMC alarm codes

174

data backup

141

diagnosing errors

162

,

164

event ID

184

integrated installing

77

LEDs

162

overview

31

replacing

163

resetting

140

troubleshooting

177

upgrading software

189

INIT-SYS command

140

in-process response, TL1

87

input alarm codes

175

CAS, CCS

110

configuring frame type

110

default parameter values

209

disabling

108

enabling

108

event ID

185

frame type

110

frequency

110

LED, on IOC

157

overview

22

priority level

113

provisioning

108

116

PRR mode

105

QLEVEL

112

selecting

35

setting PM alarm thresholds

116

specifications

196

SSMs

42

TimeProvider User’s Guide 219

Index

L—O

SSU mode

23

,

105

states

35

SUB mode

24

,

105

troubleshooting

181

input module connecting to

63

installing

63

overview

31

replacing

166

input reference signals

34

in-service, IOC

107

installation check list

82

power connections

61

rack mounting

56

unpacking

56

installing antenna

71

77

change communication settings

80

Ethernet port connections

80

power connections

61

SynCraft

215

IOC alarm codes

174

data backup

141

event ID

185

input events

185

input signals

34

LEDs

157

output events

186

overview

32

reference inputs

34

removing

158

160

replacing

160

162

resetting

140

setting parameters

107

taking out of service

107

troubleshooting

177

upgrading software

189

191

IP - Internet Protocol

80

IP address

93

L

LED indicators

IMC

162

IOC

157

power-up sequence

89

TPIU

163

,

164

lightning suppressor

72

installing

76

line build-out, setting

121

local oscillator alarms

128

220 TimeProvider User’s Guide setting the type

107

local serial port connecting to

79

overview

34

provisioning

91

92

testing

151

location, GPS antenna, setting

109

locked mode, clock

32

log in

96

first time

89

log out

97

M maintenance, preventive

156

Major LED

163

making alarm connections

70

making input connections

63

making output connections

66

making serial port connections

79

manual reference switching

114

mechanical specifications

201

memory, copying

141

Minor LED

163

mode

PRR inputs

105

reference switching

111

SSU inputs

23

,

105

SUB inputs

24

,

105

system, retrieving

106

system, setting

105

monitor input state

35

N name, setting sid

90

non-revertive mode

35

,

111

non-revertive switching mode

112

normal lock mode

32

normal response, TL1

87

notes defined

16

NTP authentication, enabling

124

ordering a license

51

overview

26

27

provisioning

122

125

O obtaining technical support

187

operating modes, clock

32

operating modes, SSU and SUB

23

OPR-ACO-ALL command

135

097-58001-02 Revision G – April 2008

ordering an NTP license

51

out-of-service, IOC

107

output alarm codes

176

CAS

42

CCS

42

default parameter values

210

enabling and disabling

119

ESF

42

event ID

186

framing type

119

overview

22

panels

39

provisioning

118

120

signal overview

39

specifications

198

testing

153

output module connecting to

66

installing

66

overview

33

replacing

165

P packaging for shipment

191

panels, output

39

parameter field separator

86

password, changng

99

peer server, NTP, provisioning

123

performance monitoring enabling

116

overview

24

PING command

94

pinout alarm connector

70

DB-9 output module

66

Ethernet connector

81

serial ports

79

pipe-mounting the antenna

73

power alarms, testing

150

connecting

61

specifications

200

troubleshooting

176

Power LED, IMC

162

Power LED, TPIU

164

power supply

33

fuse

200

preventive maintenance

156

priority level

113

provisioning alarm parameters

126

136

097-58001-02 Revision G – April 2008

Index

P—R

Ethernet parameters

93

input reference parameters

108

116

IOC parameters

105

107

NTP

122

125

output parameters

118

120

RS-232 parameters

91

92

provisioning worksheet

141

provisioning, saving

141

PRR mode inputs

105

overview

24

setting

105

PRS alarm codes

175

input frequency

110

troubleshooting

180

PRS LED

157

Q

QLEVEL

112

quality level

112

SSM

41

R rack mounting procedure

56

recommendations defined

16

reference input signals

34

reference switching, automatic

111

reference switching, manual

114

related documentation

17

remote serial port connecting to

79

overview

34

provisioning

91

92

testing

152

repairing the TimeProvider

187

restarting the TimeProvider

140

retimer default parameter values

211

enabling and disabling

120

retrieving system mode

106

return material authorization

192

returning products to factory, procedure

191

revertive mode

35

,

111

testing

150

revertive switching mode

112

RMA. see return material authorization

RS-232 parameters

91

92

RTRV-ALM command

132

RTRV-ATTR command

131

RTRV-COND command

134

TimeProvider User’s Guide 221

Index

S—T

RTRV-EQPT command

139

RTRV-HDR command

94

RTRV-LOG command

138

RTRV-SYS-MODE command

106

RTRV-USER command

101

RTRV-USER--SECU command

99

S safety considerations

156

saving provisioning data

141

selecting the reference manually

114

selecting the system reference

35

semicolon, using in commands

86

serial port connections

79

local default settings

79

overview

34

provisioning

91

92

remote default settings

79

session log-out

97

SET-ATTR command

126

SET-SID command

90

SET-SYS-MODE command

105

SET-TH command setting PM thresholds

116

,

118

setting date and time

90

setting GPS parameters

109

setting IOC parameters

107

setting non-revertive mode

35

,

111

setting revertive mode

35

,

111

setting system mode

105

shelf dimensions

201

shipping address, repair

192

shipping products to factory, procedure

191

sid, source ID, setting

90

Simple Network Management Protocol. See

SNMP

SmartClock

20

,

32

,

43

SNMP overview

28

soft reset

140

software upgrading IMC

189

upgrading IOC

189

191

source ID, setting

90

specifications clock

195

dimensions

201

environmental

202

inputs

196

outputs

198

power

200

squelching the audible alarm

135

SSM defining bit position

115

input

42

output

42

,

112

overview

41

reading

115

SSU installation ground connections

61

power connections

61

SSU mode inputs

23

,

105

overview

23

setting

105

ST3E clock type

107

standby, IOC

107

static-free storage bags

156

status, displaying

134

structure of this guide

14

SUB mode inputs

24

,

105

overview

24

setting

105

switching strategy

112

Symmetricom calling technical support

187

Global Services address

192

synchronization status messages. See SSM

SynCraft overview

214

system block diagram

31

system log-in

96

system log-out

97

system mode retrieving current

106

setting

105

system reference, selecting

35

system-level alarm codes

174

system-level alarms

176

system-level events

186

system-level events, default

172

T technical support, contacting

187

telephone assistance

187

telephone contact numbers

192

terminating character in commands

86

tid, echoing in responses

92

time and date format, GR-833

87

time, setting

90

222 TimeProvider User’s Guide

097-58001-02 Revision G – April 2008

timing antenna, installing

71

77

TL1 case sensitivity

86

command structure

86

error response

87

in-process response

87

normal response

87

TPIU description

38

installing

77

integrated, installing

77

LEDs

164

power-on LED sequence

89

troubleshooting

167

186

turning off the audible alarm

135

type, setting the clock type

107

TYPEI clock type

107

U user access level, changing

100

access level, displaying

99

adding

98

deleting

101

list, displaying

101

logging in

96

logging out

97

password, changing

99

user ID

97

W warm boot

140

warm-up mode

32

warm-up mode, clock

32

warnings defined

16

worksheet, provisioning

141

wrist strap, using

156

Y

Ymodem transfer

187

Index

U—Y

097-58001-02 Revision G – April 2008

TimeProvider User’s Guide 223

Index

Y—Y

224 TimeProvider User’s Guide

097-58001-02 Revision G – April 2008

advertisement

Was this manual useful for you? Yes No
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the workof artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Related manuals

Download PDF

advertisement

Table of contents